Revision 7.

MF635C/634C Series
Service Manual
 Important Notices

Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc. This document may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another
language, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2017

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.

1x

Check visually. Insert the claw.

1x
 Important Notices

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check a sound. Push the part.

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

1x

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

1x

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

1x 1x

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

1x 1x

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
 Contents

Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser................................................................................................................................................... 2
Laser Safety......................................................................................................................................... 2
How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................... 2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery........................................................................................................... 2
Power Supply....................................................................................................................................... 2
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery..................................................................................................3
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................3
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................3
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................3
Notes on works....................................................................................................................................3
Points to Note Before Servicing..............................................................................................................3
Points to Note at Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 4
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................... 4

1. Product Overview.............................................................................................5
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 6
Host Machine........................................................................................................................................6
Option.................................................................................................................................................. 6
Features...............................................................................................................................................6
Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 8
Specifications of Host Machine.............................................................................................................. 8
Paper type............................................................................................................................................9
Paper size.......................................................................................................................................... 10
Parts Name....................................................................................................................................... 11
External view...................................................................................................................................... 11
Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 13
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................14

2. Technical Explanation (Device).................................................................... 15

Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 16
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 16
Original Exposure/Feed System........................................................................................................17
Original Exposure System....................................................................................................................17
Original Feed System ......................................................................................................................... 19
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 22
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 22
Failure Detection.................................................................................................................................23
Controller System..............................................................................................................................24
Configuration/Function.........................................................................................................................24
Main Controller PCB............................................................................................................................25
Motor Control......................................................................................................................................25
Door Open Detection...........................................................................................................................26
Fan Control.........................................................................................................................................26

i
 Contents

Low-voltage Power Supply Control....................................................................................................... 26

Protection Function............................................................................................................................. 27
Power-saving Mode.............................................................................................................................27
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 29
Major Components..............................................................................................................................29
Image Formation Process....................................................................................................................29
High Voltage Power Supply Control......................................................................................................29
Image Stabilization Control.................................................................................................................. 30
Cartridge............................................................................................................................................ 32
Pickup Feed System......................................................................................................................... 35
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 35
Parts Configuration..............................................................................................................................36
Drive Configuration..............................................................................................................................37
Layout of Sensors............................................................................................................................... 38
Cassette Detection..............................................................................................................................38
Cassette Pickup Control...................................................................................................................... 38
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Control........................................................................................................39
Skew Correction..................................................................................................................................39
Paper Width Detection.........................................................................................................................40
Arch Control........................................................................................................................................40
Delivery Tray Full Detection................................................................................................................. 41
Jam Detection.....................................................................................................................................42
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................44
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 44
Fixing Temperature Control................................................................................................................. 44
Protection Function............................................................................................................................. 45
Fixing Assembly Failure Detection........................................................................................................45

3. Technical Explanation (System)................................................................... 47

Overview of System Management.................................................................................................... 48
Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................... 49
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................. 49
Version Upgrade Using UST................................................................................................................ 50
Version Upgrade via Internet................................................................................................................50
Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special Cases).................................. 51
Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)........................................................................... 53
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 53
Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI........................................................ 55
Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information......................................................59
List of Items Which Can Be Imported....................................................................................................60
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)............................................................ 68
Overview of System............................................................................................................................ 68
Servicing Notes...................................................................................................................................69
Setting Procedure............................................................................................................................... 69
Maintenace.........................................................................................................................................70
Error Message List.............................................................................................................................. 71
Security Functions.............................................................................................................................74
Security Policy Function...................................................................................................................... 74

ii
 Contents

4. Periodical Service.......................................................................................... 78
Periodically Replaced Parts.............................................................................................................. 79
Consumable Parts.............................................................................................................................80
Periodical Services............................................................................................................................81

5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning................................................................. 82

List of Parts....................................................................................................................................... 83
Major Units......................................................................................................................................... 83
Layout Drawing of Electrical Components............................................................................................. 85
External Cover System......................................................................................................................89
Removing the Toner Cartridge............................................................................................................. 89
Removing the Left Cover..................................................................................................................... 90
Removing the Right Cover................................................................................................................... 91
Removing the Rear Cover Unit.............................................................................................................94
Removing the Cartridge Cover ............................................................................................................ 95
Removing the Cartridge Tray............................................................................................................... 96
Removing the Upper Left Front Cover.................................................................................................. 97
Removing the Upper Right Front Cover................................................................................................ 98
Removing the Right Front Upper Cover................................................................................................ 98
Removing the Upper Cover Unit ..........................................................................................................99
Original Exposure/Feed System......................................................................................................100
Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit................................................................................................100
Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit.............................................................................................. 101
Removing the ADF Roller Unit............................................................................................................103
Removing the ADF Pickup Roller....................................................................................................... 105
Removing the ADF Separation Roller................................................................................................. 106
Removing the ADF Separation Pad Unit............................................................................................. 108
Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit................................................................................................. 109
Removing the ADF Feed Unit.............................................................................................................111
Removing the ADF CIS (For the duplex scanning model).....................................................................113
Removing the ADF Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 116
Removing the Reader Upper Cover Unit............................................................................................. 118
Removing the Reader CIS................................................................................................................. 119
Removing the Reader CIS Timing Belt................................................................................................122
Removing the Reader Scanner Motor................................................................................................. 122
Controller System............................................................................................................................124
Removing the Controller Cover ..........................................................................................................124
Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (Wi-Fi model only)...........................................................................125
Removing the Wireless LAN Support Plate (Wi-Fi model only)............................................................. 125
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 126
Removing the Main Controller Support Plate....................................................................................... 126
Removing the Engine Controller PCB................................................................................................. 127
Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.................................................................................... 128
Removing the Main Motor.................................................................................................................. 129
Removing the Control Panel Unit........................................................................................................130
Removing the OFF Hook PCB (Fax model only)..................................................................................132
Removing the NCU PCB (Fax model only).......................................................................................... 133
Removing the NCU Support Plate...................................................................................................... 133
Removing the Speaker (Fax model only).............................................................................................134

iii
 Contents

Removing the USB PCB.................................................................................................................... 135

Removing the Fan............................................................................................................................. 136
Removing the Power Switch Unit........................................................................................................137
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 139
Removing the Main Drive Assembly................................................................................................... 139
Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller............................................................................................139
Removing the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit...................................................................................... 140
Removing the ITB Unit.......................................................................................................................141
Removing the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit....................................................................... 143
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................145
Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 145
Removing the Fixing Motor................................................................................................................ 146
Pickup Feed Delivery System......................................................................................................... 148
Removing the Delivery Sensor Unit.................................................................................................... 148
Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Feed Roller Unit ....................................................................... 149
Removing the Cassette Separation Roller Unit ................................................................................... 150
Removing the Duplex Reverse Drive Unit........................................................................................... 152
Removing the Pickup Guide...............................................................................................................153
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit..................................................................................... 156

6. Adjustment................................................................................................... 159
Location where the service label is affixed .....................................................................................160
Adjustment at Parts Replacement...................................................................................................161
After Replacing the Control Panel.......................................................................................................161
After Replacing the ITB Unit...............................................................................................................161
After Replacing the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit............................................................... 161
Engine Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................161
Main Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................161
After Replacing the ADF Unit............................................................................................................. 170
After Replacing the Reader CIS Unit...................................................................................................172
After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit..................................................................................... 175
After Replacing the Reader Unit......................................................................................................... 179
After Replacing the ADF CIS Unit....................................................................................................... 186

7. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................189
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 190
Engine Test Print...............................................................................................................................190
Controller test print............................................................................................................................ 191
Cartridge Log Report.......................................................................................................................202
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................205
Remedy for Image Failure..................................................................................................................205
Recurring faulty image.......................................................................................................................205
Confirming nip width.......................................................................................................................... 205
Action When Hue Differs between the Front and Back Sides of the Output Image at Duplex Copy
(For the duplex scanning ADF model)............................................................................................. 206
Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................208
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................208
Conditions for collecting logs..............................................................................................................208
Collection procedure..........................................................................................................................208

iv
 Contents

8. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 210
Overview......................................................................................................................................... 211
Error/Jam/Alarm Log indication.......................................................................................................... 211
JAM/ERR LOG REPORT...................................................................................................................212
Location Code...................................................................................................................................213
Pickup Position Code.........................................................................................................................213
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................214
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................214
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 221
Jam Code Details..............................................................................................................................221
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 226
Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 226

9. Service Mode................................................................................................ 227

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 228
Entering Service Mode...................................................................................................................... 228
Backing up Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 228
Service Label.................................................................................................................................... 228
Remote UI Service Mode................................................................................................................... 229
Service Mode Explanation................................................................................................................. 230
COPIER (Service mode for printer).................................................................................................231
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................231
I/O (I/O display mode)........................................................................................................................233
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 234
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 276
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................. 293
COUNTER (Counter mode)............................................................................................................... 305
FEEDER (ADF service mode).........................................................................................................310
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 310
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 311
FAX (FAX service mode).................................................................................................................312
SSSW (Bit switch registration mode).................................................................................................. 312
MENU (Menu switch registration mode).............................................................................................. 313
NUM (Numeric parameter setting mode)............................................................................................. 314
NCU (NCU parameter setting mode).................................................................................................. 314
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)....................................................318
PRINT (Print test mode).....................................................................................................................318
FAX (FAX test mode).........................................................................................................................322

10. Installation.................................................................................................. 327

MiCARD Attachment Kit-B1............................................................................................................ 328
Points to Note at Installation...............................................................................................................328
Installation Outline Drawing................................................................................................................328
Checking the Contents...................................................................................................................... 328
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power..................................................................................328
Installation Procedure........................................................................................................................ 328

v
 Contents

APPENDICES....................................................................................................334
Service Tools...................................................................................................................................335
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................... 335
Solvents and Oil List..........................................................................................................................335
General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................336
Backup Data List............................................................................................................................. 339
Soft counter specifications.............................................................................................................. 341

vi
Safety Precautions
Laser..................................................... 2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery............. 2
Toner Safety..........................................3
Notes on works..................................... 3
 Safety Precautions

Laser

Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users.
Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as
safe during normal use.

How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit

This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
However, the laser scanner unit contains source of Class 3B laser beam and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries.
Therefore, be sure not to disassemble the laser scanner unit. No adjustment can be made to the laser scanner unit in the machine
in the field.
The mark or the warning label shown in the following figure is affixed on the laser scanner unit.

Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Allerdings enthält die Laserscannereinheit eine Laserstrahlquelle der Klasse 3B, die Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn
man in diesen Strahl blickt.
Deshalb darf die Laserscannereinheit nicht zerlegt werden. An der Laserscannereinheit kann keine Justage vor Ort vorgenommen
werden.
Das in dem folgenden Bild dargestellte Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber ist auf der Laserscannereinheit angebracht.

Power Supply / Lithium Battery

Power Supply
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the
power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension
cord.

CAUTION:
Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

2
 Safety Precautions

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

CAUTION:
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.

Toner Safety

About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.

CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.

Handling Adhered Toner

• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.

Notes on works

Points to Note Before Servicing

• At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry
cloth.

CAUTION:
Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will
cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure)

3
 Safety Precautions

• Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions.

CAUTION:
Hazardous area such as corners, edges, springs and other sharp sections may be remaining on products. Always be
aware of the presence of hazardous area to avoid injury caused by contacting and/or striking those area, by not over-
concentrating on service work.

Points to Note at Cleaning

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized
completely before assembling.

Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.

CAUTION:

English
CAUTION
The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors.

German
VORSICHT
Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter
stromlos zu machen.

4
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 6
Specifications........................................ 8
Parts Name......................................... 11
 1. Product Overview

Product Lineup

Host Machine

MF635Cx MF634Cdw
Copy Yes Yes
Print Yes Yes
Fax Yes Yes
Remote UI Yes Yes
ADF 2-sided scanning 2-sided scanning
2-sided printing Yes Yes
Control Panel 5 inch Touch Panel 5 inch Touch Panel
NFC - -
Backup of counter Yes Yes
MEAP - -
Network Yes Yes
Wireless LAN Yes Yes

PDL

MF635Cx MF634Cdw
PS Yes Yes
PCL Yes Yes

Option
Name Description
MiCARD Attachment Kit-B1 Attachment kit for MiCARD Reader
Except KOR model
HANDSET KIT 3 Long cord Cool White AE model only
TELEPHONE 6 KIT Long cord Cool White EUR model only
Barcode Printing Kit-E1 EUR/CHN/AE model only
Send PDF Security Feature Set-E1

Features
Low - Middle Class A4/LTR Color Laser MFP
1. Improved Control Panel operability
Improved operability by adopting the Large 5 inch Color Touch Panel.
2. 1-path simultaneous duplex reading
Increased productivity in 2-sided original reading by adopting the 1-path ADF (Scan, Send, Copy).

6
 1. Product Overview

3. Support for mobile print

Printing from smartphones, tablets and PCs via an application such as Apple AirPrint, proprietary application, Google Cloud
Print and Mopria Print becomes available.
4. Support for wireless LAN
Communication via mobile device and wireless LAN becomes available by connecting a wireless LAN router to the network
to which this machine is connected.

7
 1. Product Overview

Specifications

Specifications of Host Machine

Item Specification / Function
Copyboard Fixed
Device Installation Desktop
Light source LED (RGB)
Photoreceptor OPC drum (φ24)
Image scanning CIS (color)
Light exposure method Laser beam exposure
Charging method Roller charging
Developing method Contact development
Transfer method Primary transfer: Sequential 4 colors transfer to Intermediate Transfer Belt
Secondary transfer: 4-color batch transfer onto the transfer material by the Transfer Roller
Separation method Curvature separation
Cassette paper feed Simple separation retard
MP Tray paper feed Pad separation method
Drum cleaning method Cleaning blade
Transfer cleaning method Cleaning brush and roller
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Paper delivery method Face-down
Toner level sensor Mounted
Toner type Non-magnetic one-component toner
Toner supply method All-in-one cartridge (drum + toner)
Toner save mode N/A
Document types Sheet / book
Maximum document size Copyboard Glass: 216 mm × 297 mm
Feeder: 216 mm × 356 mm
Document size sensor N/A
Image size magnification Zoom: 25 to 400% (1% increment)
Warm-up Time *1 13 seconds or less
Recovery Time *2 Approx. 6.1 seconds
Reading resolution 600 x 600 dpi (Maximum)
Reading Speed Fixed (A4/LTR):
• N/A
Continuous reading, SEND:
• Color: 10 images / minute (A4/LTR)
• B&W: 20 images / minute (A4)
• B&W: 21 images / minute (LTR)
Print resolution 600 x 600 dpi
First copy time Color: Approx. 14.0 seconds(A4), Approx. 13.8 seconds(LTR)
B&W: Approx. 12.0 seconds(A4), Approx. 11.8 seconds(LTR)
First print time Color: Approx. 12.0 seconds(A4), Approx. 11.9 seconds(LTR)
B&W: Approx. 10.9 seconds(A4), Approx. 10.7 seconds(LTR)
Print Speed *3 At 1-sided printing:
• Color/B&W: Approx. 18 sheets/min.(A4), Approx. 19 sheets/min.(LTR)
At 2-sided printing:
• Color/B&W: Approx. 11.0 sheets/min.(A4), Approx. 11.3 sheets/min.(LTR)
Available paper type for cas- Plain L, Recycled paper, Color paper, Plain paper, Heavy paper, Coated paper, Label, Envelope
sette (Refer to “Paper type” on page 9)
Available paper type for Mul- Plain L, Recycled paper, Color paper, Plain paper, Heavy paper, Coated paper, Label, Envelope
ti-purpose Tray (Refer to “Paper type” on page 9)
Available paper size in cas- A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, GLTR, GLGL, FLS, AFLS,
sette indLGL, K16, Postcard, Envelopes (COM10, Monarch, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, C5, DL), Custom
Paper Size
(Refer to “Paper size” on page 10)

8
 1. Product Overview

Item Specification / Function

Multi-purpose tray paper size A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, GLTR, GLGL, FLS, AFLS,
indLGL, K16, Envelopes (COM10, Monarch, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, C5, DL), Custom Paper Size
(Refer to “Paper size” on page 10)
Cassette capacity Cassette: 150 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)
Multi-purpose Tray capacity 1 sheet (60 to 90 g/m2)
Delivery tray stacking ca- 100 sheets (75 g/m2)
pacity *4
Continuous copying 1 to 99 sheets
Automatic 2-sided Available (A4, B5, LGL, LTR, EXEC, FLS)
Memory capacity 1 GB
Sleep mode Available
Allowable environmental 10 to 30 deg C
temperature
Allowable humidity 20 to 80% in relative humidity (no condensation)
Power rating Rated input voltage:
120 V system: 120 to 127 V (60Hz)
200 V system: 220 to 240 V (50/60Hz)
Maximum power consump- 900 W or lower
tion
Average power at operation 120 V : Approx. 340 W
230 V : Approx. 350 W
Average power at standby 120 V : Approx. 12.8 W
230 V : Approx. 13.6 W
Average power at sleep 120 V : Approx. 0.94 W
mode 230 V : Approx. 0.95 W
Power consumption at Main 0.3 W or lower
Power Switch OFF
Dimensions (W x D x H) 451 × 460 × 400 mm
Weight Approx. 22.0 kg
(Excluding toner cartridges)

*1 : Warm-up time is an interval between when the machine is turned ON and when the main screen appears on the display.
Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.
*2 : Time for recovery from sleep to standby.
*3 : The print speed may become lower depending on the settings such as output resolution, paper size, type, orientation, and
number of sheets printed. In the case of 2-sided printing, 1 page on the front side and 1 page on the back side are output as
1 sheet.
*4 : The actual stack capacity varies depending on the site environment and the type of paper used.

Paper type
(Yes: Pickup possible -: Pickup not possible)

Type of paper Paper set- Standard Cassette/ Multi-purpose Tray Auto 2-sided printing
tings in this
machine
Plain L 60 to 70 g/m2 Plain L Yes Yes Yes
60 g/m2 Plain L2 *1 Yes Yes Yes
52 to 59 g/m2 Plain L3 Yes - -
Recycled 60 to 75 g/m2 Recycled 1 Yes Yes Yes
71 to 82 g/m2 Recycled 2 Yes Yes Yes
Color 71 to 82 g/m2 Color Yes Yes Yes
Plain 71 to 82 g/m2 Plain 1 Yes Yes Yes
83 to 90 g/m2 Plain 2 Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 91 to 119 g/m2 Heavy 1 Yes Yes Yes
120 to 128 g/m2 Heavy 2 Yes Yes Yes
129 to 163 g/m2 Heavy 3 Yes Yes Yes

9
 1. Product Overview

Type of paper Paper set- Standard Cassette/ Multi-purpose Tray Auto 2-sided printing
tings in this
machine
Coated 100 to 120 g/m2 Coated 1 Yes Yes Yes
121 to 150 g/m2 Coated 2 Yes Yes Yes
151 to 200 g/m2 Coated 3 Yes Yes Yes
Label paper Label paper Yes Yes -
Envelope (Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, Envelope 1 Yes Yes -
C5)
Envelope (COM10, Monarch, DL) Envelope 2 Yes Yes -

*1: When the paper of 60 g/m2 is curled while <Plain L> is set, select <Plain L2>.

Paper size
(Yes: Pickup possible -: Pickup not possible)

Paper size Standard Cassette/ Multi-purpose Tray Auto 2-sided printing

A4 210.0 mm x 297.0 mm Yes Yes Yes
B5 182.0 mm x 257.0 mm Yes Yes Yes
A5 148.0 mm x 210.0 mm Yes Yes -
LGL 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm Yes Yes Yes
LTR 215.9 mm x 279.4 mm Yes Yes Yes
STMT 139.7 mm x 215.9 mm Yes Yes -
EXEC 184.2 mm x 266.7 mm Yes Yes Yes
OFFICIO*4 215.9 mm x 317.5 mm Yes Yes Yes
B-OFFICIO*4 216 mm x 355 mm Yes Yes Yes
M-OFFICIO*4 216 mm x 341 mm Yes Yes Yes
G-LTR*4 203.2 mm x 266.7 mm Yes Yes Yes
G-LGL*4 203.2 mm x 330.2 mm Yes Yes Yes
FLSC 215.9 mm x 330.2 mm Yes Yes Yes
AFLS*4 206 mm x 338 mm Yes Yes Yes
Indian LGL*4 215.0 mm x 345.0 mm Yes Yes -
Envelope No.10 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm Yes Yes -
(COM10)
Envelope Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm Yes Yes -
Envelope C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm Yes Yes -
Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm Yes Yes -
Custom paper - Yes *1 Yes *2 Yes *3

*1: 76.2 × 127 mm to 215.9 × 355.6 mm

*2: 676.2 × 127 mm to 215.9 × 355.6 mm
*3: 182 × 257 mm to 215.9 × 355.6 mm
*4: Only when the user-defined size is configured on the driver

10
 1. Product Overview

Parts Name

External view
■ Front side of the machine

[1]

[12]
[6]

[7]
[2]
[8]
[3]

[4] [9]

[5] [10]
[5]
[11]

No. Name No. Name

1 Feeder 8 Power Switch
2 USB port (for USB device) 9 Front Cover
3 Delivery Stopper 10 Pickup Cassette
4 Speaker 11 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Slot
5 Handle for carrying 12 Copyboard Glass
6 Control Panel
7 Delivery Tray

11
 1. Product Overview

■ Rear side of the machine

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]
[7]

[2] [8]

[3] [9]

No. Name No. Name

1 Rear Cover 6 LAN Port
2 Rating name plate label 7 Terminal for Handset
3 Power Socket 8 Terminal for external telephone
4 USB port (for USB device) 9 Terminal for telephone line
5 USB port (for PC)

■ Inside of the host machine

[1]

No. Name
1 Toner Cartridge Tray

12
 1. Product Overview

Cross Section View

■ Host machine
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Duplex Feed Roller [11] Priority Slot Feed Roller
[2] Pressure Roller [12] Cassette
[3] Duplex Flapper [13] ITB
[4] Fixing Film [14] ITB Drive Roller
[5] Delivery Roller [15] Registration Shutter
[6] Fixing Assembly [16] Pickup Roller
[7] Photosensitive Drum [17] Separation Roller
[8] Laser Scanner Unit [18] Registration Roller
[9] Color Displacement Density [19] Secondary Transfer Roller
Sensor
[10] Primary Transfer Roller [20] Duplex Re-pickup Roller

■ ADF/Reader Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4]

[7] [6] [5]

No. Name
[1] Feed Roller

13
 1. Product Overview

No. Name
[2] Separation Roller
[3] Pickup Roller
[4] Separation Pad
[5] Delivery Roller
[6] Contact Image Sensor (back side)
[7] Contact Image Sensor (front side)

Control Panel

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

No. Name
1 Display
2 Volume key
3 Energy Saver key
4 Data Lamp
5 Error Lamp
6 Home key
7 Stop key

14
2 Technical
Explanation
(Device)
Basic Configuration............................. 16
Original Exposure/Feed System......... 17
Laser Exposure System...................... 22
Controller System................................24
Image Formation System.................... 29
Pickup Feed System........................... 35
Fixing System......................................44
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Basic Configuration

Functional Configuration
Description
This machine is roughly composed of the following six blocks.
• Original Exposure/Feed System
• Laser Exposure System
• Controller System
• Image Formation System
• Pickup Feed System
• Fixing System

Document exposure/
ADF feeding system

CIS unit

Delivery
assembly
Main
controller
Laser exposure system

Fixing system Laser scanner

DC Fixing
controller assembly Image
formation
system Drum Drum Drum Drum

Secondary ITB unit

Transfer
Controller system

Pickup Manual feed

unit pickup unit
Laser beam
Paper flow Cassette
Pickup/feed system
Signal flow

16
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Original Exposure/Feed System

Original Exposure System

■ Functional Configuration
Description
The original on the Copyboard Glass is read by moving the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) by rotating the Reader Motor based on
the drive signal from the Main Controller PCB.
When using the ADF, the original is read by feeding it using the ADF, without moving the Contact Image Sensor.
Simultaneous duplex scanning models have 2 Contact Image Sensors, and the front and back sides of paper are scanned at the
same time with one feed of the paper.
* This model is not included in the lineup of some of the series. (Reference: “Product Lineup” on page 6)

■ Specifications
Description

Item Specification/Function
Photo conductor LED
Reading resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of gradations 256 gradations
Magnification ratio 25 % to 400 % (in 1% increment)
Reading Sensor 1 line
Original size detection None

■ Major Components
Description

UN40

SR11 CIS

M5

Symbol Name
M5 Reader Motor
CIS Contact Image Sensor
SR11 CIS HP Sensor
UN40 Connecting Relay PCB

■ Dust Detection Control

Overview
Presence/absence of dust on the Stream Reading Glass is detected when an original is read. In accordance with the detection
result, the original reading position is changed or image correction is performed to prevent the dust from being printed on the
image.

17
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Control of dust detection consists of the following two items:

• Dust detection correction
• Dust detection evasion

Execution Condition/Timing
Dust detection correction
During the period of time from the moment when the original of a stream reading job arrives just before the reading position
to the moment when reading of the original is completed (for each page)

Dust detection evasion

When a job starts

Description
Dust detection correction
If dust on the Stream Reading Glass is detected, the image is corrected to prevent the dust from being printed.
1. Before the original arrives, the White Plate is read through the Stream Reading Glass, and points where dust may exist
are detected.
2. The leading edge of the original is detected.
3. The detection results before and after the leading edge of the original appears on the Stream Reading Glass are
compared. If dust does not exist at the dust point detected in step 1, it is judged to be dust on the White Plate and dust
correction is not performed. If dust exists at the point detected in step 1, it is judged to be dust on the Stream Reading
Glass and dust correction is performed.

Dust detection evasion

If dust is detected when the last job paper is read, the reading position of the next stream reading job is changed in order to
avoid the dust.
The amount of adjustment for dust evasion is -0.5 mm (B), 0 mm (A), and +0.5 mm (C).
Each time dust is detected when reading the last paper of a stream reading job, the CIS moves to the three positions in the
order shown below.
A -> B -> C -> A ->

0.5 mm 0.5 mm

B A C

NOTE:
In the case of simultaneous duplex scanning models, this control is applied only to reading of the front side where the CIS can be
moved.

If any of the following conditions is detected 6 times in a row, it is judged that the Stream Reading Glass is soiled, and a message
prompting the user to clean the Stream Reading Glass is displayed on the Control Panel.
• Dust of 1 pixel or larger and smaller than 5 pixels is detected at 11 points or more.
• Dust of 5 pixels or larger is detected at 1 point or more.

Service Mode
• Adjustment of the image correction level at stream reading [front]
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DFDST-L1
• Adjustment of the image correction level at stream reading [back]
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DF2DSTL1

Additional Functions Mode/Menu

• ON/OFF of automatic correction at the time of dust detection
Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Remove Streaks from Orig. Scanning Area

18
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

• ON/OFF of notification to clean the Stream Reading Glass

Menu > Preferences > Display Settings > Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area

Original Feed System

■ ADF Specifications
Description

Item Specification
Original separation method Upper separation
Document scanning method Stream reading
Original basis weight 50 to 105 g/m2
Original size A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT
Feed direction: 128 to 355.6 mm, Width direction: 105.0 to 215.9 mm
Original Tray stacking capacity A4/LTR: 50sheets (80 g/m2)
LGL: 30sheets (80 g/m2)
Original size detection function No
Mixed paper functions Mix of the same configuration: Yes
Mix of different configurations: No
Finished stamp function No
Maximum document size 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm
Document processing speed Stream reading
• Copy
• 1-sided
A4/LTR: 27 ipm /28 ipm (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Black and White)
A4/LTR: 27 ipm /28 ipm (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Color)
• 2-sided
A4/LTR: 48 ipm /47 ipm (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Black and White)
A4/LTR: 28 ipm /27 ipm (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Color)
• Scan
• 1-sided
A4/LTR: 27 ipm /28 ipm (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Black and White)
A4/LTR: 13.5 ipm /14 ipm (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Color)
• 2-sided
A4/LTR: 48 ipm /47 ipm (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Black and White)
A4/LTR: 28 ipm /27 ipm (300 dpi x 300 dpi, Color)

■ Major Components
Description

M11
SR9
SR10

CIS

Symbol Name Remarks

M11 ADF Motor -

19
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Symbol Name Remarks

CIS Contact Image Sensor * Simultaneous duplex scanning
models only. (Reference: “Product
Lineup” on page 6)
SR9 Document Sensor -
SR10 Document End Sensor -

■ Drive Configuration
Description
When copy, fax, or scan is started, the ADF Motor (M11) is driven by a drive command from the Main Controller PCB.
The document which is placed face-up on the Original Tray is picked up and fed one sheet at a time in order from the top.
When the fed original passes over the Platen Glass, the image is read by the Contact Image Sensor (CIS), and then the original
is delivered face-down to the Document Delivery Assembly.

MCON M11

Symbol Name
M11 ADF Motor
MCON Main Controller PCB

* Simultaneous duplex scanning models only. (Reference: “Product Lineup” on page 6)

■ Original Detection
Overview
This machine has the following two types of original detection functions.
• Original Detection
• Original Edge Detection

NOTE:
This machine does not have a document size (original width) detection function.

Description
Original Detection
As the actuator is pushed up by placing an original on the Original Tray, the Document Sensor (SR9) is turned ON (light is
transmitted -> light is blocked) so that the presence of an original is detected.

Original Edge Detection

As the actuator is pushed up by the leading edge of the fed original, the Document End Sensor (SR10) is turned ON (light
is blocked -> light is transmitted) so that the leading edge of the original is detected.
In addition, when the trailing edge of the original passes the position of the actuator, the actuator returns to the original
position, which causes the Document End Sensor (SR10) to turn OFF (light is transmitted -> light is blocked) to detect the
trailing edge of the original.
Note that the original length that can be read by this machine is 400 mm and less; if an original longer than that is fed, it is
stopped due to jam. The original length is determined by the time required from when the Document End Sensor (SR10)
detects the original's leading edge to when it detects its trailing edge.

20
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

SR9

SR10

MCON

Symbol Name
SR9 Document Sensor
SR10 Document End Sensor

* Simultaneous duplex scanning models only. (Reference: “Product Lineup” on page 6)

■ Jam Detection
Execution Condition/Timing
When the power is turned ON or when the original is being read

Description
In the following cases, it is judged that an ADF jam has occurred.
• When the original is late in arriving the Document End Sensor or remains in the ADF while the original is being read
• When the Document End Sensor detects presence of paper when the power is turned ON (residual paper jam)
• When a document of 400 mm or more is detected
When a jam is detected, the reading operation stops and "Paper is jammed." is displayed on the screen of the Control Panel.
In the case of models equipped with the fax function (built-in speaker), a warning tone (beep sound) sounds when a jam is
detected.
The jam can be cleared by removing the jammed paper, opening and then closing the ADF Upper Cover, and placing the original
again.

21
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Laser Exposure System

Functional Configuration
Overview
The Laser Exposure system irradiates the Photosensitive Drum with a laser to form a latent image on it according to the video
signal sent from the Main Controller.

Description
The Laser Scanner Unit consists of the Laser Unit and the Scanner Motor Unit, and is controlled by the signal input from the DC
Controller.

[3]

[4]

[2]
[1]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Laser Unit [6] Photosensitive Drum (M)
[2] BD Sensor [7] Photosensitive Drum (C)
[3] Scanner Mirror [8] Photosensitive Drum (Bk)
[4] Scanner Motor Unit [9] DC Controller
[5] Photosensitive Drum (Y) - -

CAUTION:
The Laser Scanner Unit of this equipment cannot be replaced because the setting values cannot be adjusted in the field.

22
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Failure Detection
Overview
The DC Controller detects the following failures in the Laser Scanner Unit.
• Scanner area failure
• Scanner Motor startup failure

Description
Scanner area failure detection
If an error in any of the Scanner Motor, Laser Driver, or BD detection in the scanner area is detected, an error code is notified.

Scanner Motor startup failure detection

If the scanner does not start although a specified period of time has elapsed after the Scanner Motor is driven, an error code
is notified.

Error Code
E100: Scanner area failure
• E100-0000: Yellow scanner area failure
• E100-0001: Magenta scanner area failure
• E100-0002: Cyan scanner area failure
• E100-0003: Black scanner area failure
E110: Scanner Motor startup failure
• E110-0000: Primary Pseudo BD correction failure

23
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Controller System

Configuration/Function
Description
This product is mainly controlled by the main and DC controllers.

[1]

[3]

[2]

No. Parts name Function

[1] Main Controller PCB Provides controls on the system, image processing, reader / ADF, FAX and network and
maintain various setting values.
[2] Engine Controller PCB *1 Provides controls on printer, laser, high-voltage PCBs, I/O, etc. and maintain setting val-
ues.
[3] eMMC PCB Storing System Software

*1:The engine controller PCB consists of it by a high voltage power supply circuit and a DC controller circuit.

24
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Main Controller PCB

Description

J924 J922 J917

J918

J927

J925
J923 J926
J907
J903

J906

J904
J905

J911

J910
J909

J908 J921 J916 J912 J919

No. Roles and Specifications No. Roles and Specifications

J903 eMMC PCB I/F J916 NCU PCB I/F
J904 Wireless LAN PCB I/F J917 Off Hook PCB I/F
J905 LAN I/F J918 USB 2.0 Relay PCB I/F
J906 USB TypeB J919 Speaker
J907 USB TypeA J921 Engine Controller PCB I/F
J908 CC-VI (OP) J922 ADF Motor I/F
J909 Serial No PCB I/F J923 Reader Motor I/F
J910 New card reader (OP) J924 FFC Relay PCB I/F
J911 Memory PCB I/F J925 FFC Relay PCB I/F (1PDS)
J912 Power supply control I/F J926 5-inch Touch Panel
J914 5-line Control Panel PCB I/F J927 5-inch Touch Panel PCB I/F
J916 NCU PCB I/F

Motor Control
Overview
This machine uses motors for paper feed and image formation.

Description

Name Symbol Drive parts Failure Detection

Main Motor M701 Photosensitive Drum, Developing Assembly, ITB, Developing Roller, and engage- Yes
ment/disengagement of the Developing Roller
Fixing Motor M702 Pressure Roller, engagement/disengagement of the Pressure Roller, and Delivery None
Roller
Pickup Motor M703 Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, Registration Roller, Duplex Feed Roller*, and Duplex None
Re-pickup Roller*
Scanner Motor M704 Scanner Mirror None

25
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

*: Duplex models only

Door Open Detection

Overview
This machine uses the Door Open Sensor to detect whether the door is opened or closed.

Description

Sensor name Symbol Role

Front Cover Sensor SW4 To detect whether the Front Cover is opened or closed.
Rear Cover Sensor SW3 To detect whether the Rear Cover is opened or closed.

When door open is detected by this sensor, the DC Controller stops drive of the motors and the solenoids.

Fan Control
Overview
This machine uses a fan for preventing temperature rising inside the machine and for cooling the delivered paper.

Description

Sym-
Name Cooling area Type Speed
bol
Main Fan FM1 Around the cartridge and low voltage power Suction Full speed
supply

Low-voltage Power Supply Control

Overview
This circuit converts the AC voltage to DC power supply and provides it to each load.

Description
The following shows a block diagram of the low voltage power supply .
• Low voltage power supply: Generates the DC power supply needed inside the printer. In addition, provides AC power supply
to the low voltage power supply and controls the fixing heater temperature of the Fixing Assembly.
The low voltage power supply starts to operate when the AC power supply is connected to the inlet. The AC power supply is
converted to +24 V, which is the DC power supply required by the printer, and +3.3 V.

26
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

AC input

Low-voltage power supply DC controller

Fuse
FU101
Fixing control
circuit
Power switch
Rectifying SW601
circuit

PWSV

+24V +24VA +3.3V +3.3VA Front door switch

Generation Generation SW4
circuit circuit
+3.3VA

+24VB +3.3VB
Protection +24V +24VB1 +3.3V
circuit Control circuit +3.3VD
Control circuit REM24V
+3.3VC

+3.3VC +24VB

Main controller, Contol panel

Protection Function
Overview
This machine has a protection function against overcurrent and overvoltage.

Description
If overcurrent or abnormal voltage occurs due to a trouble, the DC voltage is automatically cut off to prevent damage to the Power
Supply PCBs.
When no DC voltage is output from the Low Voltage Power Supply Assembly, it is possible that the protection function has been
activated. Therefore, turn OFF the Power Switch, disconnect the AC Power Supply Cord from the inlet, and then fix the trouble
before turning ON the Power Switch again.

NOTE:
Leave the machine as it is for approx. 15 minutesafter disconnecting the cord from the inlet. There are cases where electric charge
remains in the electrolytic capacitor on the primary side of the Power Supply PCB, and time for releasing the electric charge is
needed.

Power-saving Mode
Overview
Power-saving mode is a function that reduces the printer power consumption.

27
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Description

AC OFF

Explanation Power supply

of the status state of ECU
AC Off
Power-on Standby
AC Connection
(8VXDOO\) Power-saving Active Off

Power-off Inactive Off

AC Connection
Power-off AC Off
(After the interruption
of a momentary power
The automatic shutdown time has passed.
supply.)
Inactive Off

The power switches is pressed.

Press the Power switch for a long time

Standby/ Sleep 1B Sleep

Hook detection
Service error
The event to return to standby.
Control Panel The auto sleep time has passed. Non-all-night
24V OFF
Leader
Energy saver Automatically shifted
The energy saver The auto sleep depending on the conditions
Engine key is pressed. time has passed.
ECU)
↓A job is
The event to
generated
Sleep 3
Controller return to standby.
/completed.↑
Hook detection
Standby Non-all-night
Non-all-night
24V ON
Standby 24V OFF
Active Off

Engine (ECU) CNT Non-all-night 24 ECU CPU power

CNT All-night 3.3 V Remarks
Power state V supply
Standby ON ON ON Standby/Energy saving
Active Off ON OFF ON Sleep 1B/Sleep 3
Inactive Off OFF OFF ON AC applied

The low voltage power supply stops supplying power from the +24V generation circuit when it receives a power-saving transition
mode signal (REM24V) from the DC Controller.

28
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Image Formation System

Major Components
Description
[3]

[4]

[2]
Y M C Bk
[5]
[1]

[10]

[9] [8] [7] [6]

No. Name No. Name

[1] ITB Cleaning Brush [6] Color Displacement/Density Sensor
[2] ITB Cleaning Roller [7] Primary Transfer Pad
[3] Developing Cylinder [8] ITB Unit
[4] Toner Cartridge [9] Secondary Transfer Roller
[5] Photosensitive Drum [10] ITB Drive Roller

Image Formation Process

Description
: Paper path
: Direction of drum rotation
: Functional block
Delivery
: Step
Fixing Latent image formation

7. Fixing 2. Laser-beam exposure

Developing 1. Priminary charging

3. Developing
Y M C Bk
Transfer Drum cleaning
9. Drum cleaning
6. Separation ITB cleaning
8. ITB cleaning 4. Primary transfer
5. Secondary transfer

Registration

Pickup

High Voltage Power Supply Control

Description
The High Voltage Power Supply applies high voltage biases to the following:
• Static Eliminator

29
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

• Primary Charging Roller (inside the cartridge)

• Developing Cylinder (inside the cartridge)
• Primary Transfer Pad
• Secondary Transfer Roller
• ITB Cleaning Assembly

The high voltage biases are generated by the DC Controller controlling the High Voltage Power Supply.

Cartridge

ITB cleaning brush

Y M
C Bk

Static charge ITB unit

eliminator

Primary
Secondary transfer pad
transfer roller

ITB cleaning brush Static charge Secondary Primary Primary transfer Primary transfer
eliminator bias transfer transfer bias and developing bias and developing
bias circuit circuit bias circuit bias circuit bias circuit (Bk) bias circuit (YMC)

High-voltage power supply

DC controller

Image Stabilization Control

Overview
Image stabilization control is performed in order to prevent image failure due to change of the environment, deterioration of the
Photosensitive Drum, deterioration of the toner, etc. and to ensure stable printing.
• Image Density Correction Control (D-max control)
• Image Gradation Correction Control (D-half control)
• Color Displacement Correction Control
• Auto Gradation Adjustment Control

30
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Laser scanner unit

Cartridge

Color displacement
/density sensor

ITB unit

Bias Signal from color displacement

High-voltage /density signal
power supply PCBs
Video signal

DC controller

Auto-gradation
D-max correction control

Reader unit Color displacement

D-half correction control

Main controller

Execution Condition/Timing
Correction controls are performed under the following conditions:

Execution timing D-max D-half Color displacement

correction
At power-on Yes Yes Yes
When the Toner Cartridge is replaced Yes Yes Yes
When the environment (temperature) changes Yes Yes Yes
After printing the specified number of pages Yes Yes Yes
After the specific period of time has passed Yes Yes Yes
When recovering from sleep mode (8 hours or more) Yes Yes -
When [Full Adjust] is executed Yes Yes -
When [Quick Adjust] is executed Yes Yes -
When [Adjust Copy Image] is executed Yes Yes -
When [Correct Print Color Mismatch] is executed - - Yes

Description
Image Density Correction Control (D-max control)
It is performed to stabilize the image density of the printer.
The DC Controller corrects the primary charging bias and developing bias values.

Image Gradation Correction Control (D-half control)

It is performed to stabilize the image gradation of the printer.
The Main Controller performs gradation adjustment based on the measurement results of the halftone density performed by
the DC Controller.

Color Displacement Correction Control

Color displacement that occurs due to the individual differences of the Laser Scanner Unit and Toner Cartridge is corrected.
The Main Controller performs the following color displacement corrections by controlling the video signal based on the color
displacement information measured by the DC Controller.
• Write-start position in the horizontal scanning direction
• Horizontal scanning magnification ratio
• Write-start position in the vertical scanning direction

Auto Gradation Adjustment Control

It is performed to stabilize the gradation density characteristics of the image.

31
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Item Description Test pattern

Number of Type
output
sheets
Full adjustment Gradation adjustment is performed by outputting a test pattern and 2 sheets First sheet: For error diffu-
reading the gradation density using the reader. sion
Second sheet: For multi-
value gradation
Quick Adjust Gradation adjustment is performed by D-half Control without output- - -
ting a test pattern.
Adjust Copy Im- Gradation adjustment mainly of copied images is performed by out- 1 sheet For error diffusion
age putting a test pattern and reading its gradation density using the read-
er.

Additional Functions Mode/Menu

• Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Quick Adjust
• Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust
• Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Adjust Copy Image
• Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Print Color Mismatch

Cartridge
Description
The cartridge of this machine has the function to form a visible image on the Photosensitive Drum with toner.
There are 4 types: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, and all of them have the same structure.
The cartridge of this machine consists of the Photosensitive Drum, Developing Unit, Primary Charging Roller, Memory, etc.
The DC Controller rotates the Main Motor, and drives the Photosensitive Drum, Developing Unit, and Primary Charging Roller.
The DC Controller detects the toner level by monitoring the toner level detection signal.

DC controller

Memory

Cartridge

M701

Developing roller Main Motor

Primary charging
roller

Developing unit

Photosensitive drum

32
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

■ Memory
Description
This machine detects/records the cartridge usage status, etc. by reading/writing data stored in the memory by the DC Controller.
If the memory cannot be detected, "Cartridge Communication Error. A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use." is
displayed.

■ Cartridge Detection
Execution Condition/Timing
• At power-on
• When the Front Cover is closed

Description
The DC Controller detects whether a cartridge is installed according to the change in primary charging current. The DC Controller
notifies the Main Controller of the absence of a cartridge if it judges there is no cartridge.

Display on the Control Panel:

Toner Cartridge Not Inserted

■ Cartridge Life Detection

Description
The DC Controller notifies the Main Controller when cartridge consumption reaches the specified value.
Upon reception of the notification the Main Controller displays a warning or a message that the cartridge has reached the end of
its life.

Warning display*2 End of life display*4, *5

Toner level*1 Differs depending on the setting*3 0%
Detected to (location) Memory Memory
Message (machine opera- Prepare cartridge. End of Cartridge Lifetime
tion)

*1: Select the following to check the remaining toner level.

• Status Monitor > Device Information > Cartridge Information
*2: Whether to display or hide warnings can be specified in the menu.
*3: The threshold value to display a warning can be specified in the menu.
*4: The operation when the cartridge has reached the end of life can be specified in service mode.
*5: The reference value of cartridge life (Photosensitive Drum, Developing Unit, and Waste Toner) can be specified in service
mode.

Service Mode
• Setting of the behavior when the cartridge reaches the end of its estimated life
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CRG-PROC
• Setting of the reference values for replacement of the Photosensitive Drum, Developing Assembly, and Waste Toner (Bk)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CRGLF-K
• Setting of the reference values for replacement of the Photosensitive Drum, Developing Assembly, and Waste Toner (Y/M/
C)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CRGLF-CL
• ON/OFF of display of the screen for setting the threshold value for preparation of the cartridge
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > CRGLW-LV

Additional Functions Mode/Menu

• Setting of whether to display or hide warnings
Menu > Preferences > Display Settings > Display Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.
• Setting of the threshold value to display a warning
Menu > Preferences > Display Settings > Display Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif. > Custom

33
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

■ Developing Cylinder Engagement/Disengagement Control

Overview
The DC Controller engages/disengages the Developing Cylinder in the Toner Cartridge with/from the Photosensitive Drum.

Execution Condition/Timing
The Developing Cylinder is engaged or disengaged depending on the state of this machine.

State of this machine Y/M/C Bk

Power Supply Off/Standby Disengagement
B&W Print Disengagement Engagement
Full Color Print Engagement

Description
In accordance with the specified print mode (full color or B&W), only the Developing Cylinder(s) necessary for the mode is engaged
with the Photosensitive Drum.
The Developing Cylinders are engaged only when needed, and this prevents deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum and
ensures the maximum life.

For engagement/disengagement of the Developing Cylinders, the DC Controller drives the Developing Disengagement Solenoid
(SL711) while the Main Motor (M701) is driving to change the orientation of the Engagement/Disengagement Cam.
The DC Controller detects the current state using the Developing HP Switch (SW1), and determines the state (engaged or
disengaged) of the Developing Cylinders on the basis of the amount of rotation of the Main Motor after the Developing
Disengagement Solenoid starts to be driven.

Error Code
• E015-0000: Error in Developing Disengagement Motor

34
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Pickup Feed System

Overview
Overview
The pickup, feed, and delivery systems are controlled by the DC Controller.
The DC Controller controls the blocks in the pickup, feed, and delivery systems to pickup, feed, and deliver paper inside the
machine.

Description
The pickup, feed, and delivery systems consist of the following three blocks.
• Pickup/Feed: From each pickup slot to the inlet of the Fixing Assembly
• Fixing/Delivery: From the Fixing Assembly to the delivery outlet
• Duplex*: From the Duplex Reverse Assembly to the Duplex Re-pickup Assembly
*: Duplex models only

Simplex paper path

Duplex paper path

Duplex block

Fuser-and-delivery block

Pickup-and-feed block

35
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Parts Configuration
Description
[1] [2] [3] [4]

[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5]

No. Name No. Name

[1] Duplex Feed Roller [7] Feed Roller
[2] Pressure Roller [8] Separation Roller
[3] Duplex Flapper [9] Registration Roller
[4] Delivery Roller [10] Secondary Transfer Roller
[5] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [11] Duplex Re-pickup Roller
[6] Pickup Roller

36
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Drive Configuration
Description

SL714 M702

M701

SL713 SL712

M703

Sym- Name Sym- Name

bol bol
M701 Main Motor SL712 Pickup Solenoid
M702 Fixing Motor SL713 Duplex Re-pickup Solenoid*
M703 Pickup Motor SL714 Duplex Reverse Solenoid*

*: Duplex models only

37
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Layout of Sensors
Description

SR608
SR607

SR616

SR604
SR603 SW5

SR601
SR602

Sym- Name Sym- Name

bol bol
SW5 Multi-purpose Pickup Switch SR604 Registration Sensor
SR601 Paper Width Sensor (Right) SR607 Fixing Delivery Sensor
SR602 Paper Width Sensor (Left) SR608 Delivery Sensor
SR603 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sensor SR616 Loop Sensor

Cassette Detection
Description
Presence of the cassette is detected using the Multi-purpose Pickup Sensor (SR603).
The cassette detection flag of the cassette is detected by the Multi-purpose Pickup Sensor in the host machine.

Cassette Pickup Control

Description
The DC Controller rotates the Feed Roller by rotating the Pickup Motor (M703).
The Pickup Arm is lifted and lowered to feed the paper by rotating the Pickup Cam with the Pickup Solenoid (SL712).

Double Feed Prevention Mechanism

This machine employs the retard separation method for double feed prevention.
The retard separation method of this machine is a method that prevents paper double feeds by using the Separation Roller
without drive.
The Separation Roller is driven and rotated by the Feed Roller.
• At normal time
The Separation Roller is driven by the Feed Roller drive via paper. This causes the Separation Roller to rotate in the
feed direction.
• During Double Feed
Since the friction force between sheets of paper becomes weaker when there are multiple sheets of paper, the Feed
Roller drive force transmitted to the Separation Roller becomes extremely weak.
Since force suppressing rotation is applied to the Separation Roller of this machine, this mechanism does not allow
rotation by the weak drive force transmitted from the Feed Roller during double feed. The Separation Rollers therefore
do not rotate and do not pickup double feed paper.

38
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Feed roller

Media

Separation roller
Lifting plate

The separation roller does not rotate.

<Normal-feed> <Multiple-feed>

Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Control

Description
The Multi-purpose Tray pickup feeds paper from the Multi-purpose Tray one sheet at a time into the machine.
The following describes the operation of the Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
1. When paper is inserted into the Multi-purpose Tray, the Multi-purpose Pickup Switch (SW5) detects the paper.
2. When the Multi-purpose Pickup Switch (SW5) detects paper, the DC Controller rotates the Pickup Motor (M703).
3. When the Pickup Motor (M703) rotates, the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller rotates and feeds paper.
4. When the Multi-purpose Pickup Sensor (SR603) detects paper, the Pickup Motor (M703) stops after feeding the paper for a
specified period of time.

DC Controller
media presence detection signal
Pickup Sensor signal

Multi-purpose tray
Multi-purpose tray

control signal
Pickup motor

Pickup Motor M703

SW5
SR603
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller

Skew Correction
Description
This machine can correct paper skew without lowering throughput.
Skew is corrected as follows.
1. The paper leading edge pushes against the Registration Shutter to align the leading edge of the paper.
2. The trailing edge of the paper is fed and slack is generated at the leading edge of the paper.
3. When the trailing edge is fed even further, the paper leading edge for which slack was generated pushes up the Registration
Shutter and then the paper is fed to the Registration Roller while the paper leading edge is aligned.

39
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Registration Shutter

Paper Registration Shutter Feed Roller

Paper

Paper Width Detection

Description
Detection of paper width is performed to prevent temperature increase at the edge of the Fixing Heater.
The width of paper being fed is detected by the Paper Width Sensor (Right) (SR601) and Paper Width Sensor (Left) (SR602).
When either of the Paper Width Sensor Flags on the right and left is turned ON, it is detected that the paper width is 210 mm or
wider.
If the paper width detected by the Paper Width Sensor Front did not match the paper size set in the paper size of the Select
Feeder menu, "Check paper size." is displayed on the Control Panel.

Paper Width Sensor (SR601/SRS602) Detection result Paper size

ON Paper width: 210 mm or wider A4, LTR, LGL, Indian LGL
OFF Paper width: shorter than 210 mm EXEC, B5, A6, A5

Arch Control
Description
Arch control keeps the appropriate slack on paper to prevent image failure and feed failure.
• If the rotation speed of the Fixing Motor is slower than the rotation speed of the Main Motor, the slack on the paper becomes
larger.
• If the rotation speed of the Fixing Motor is faster than the rotation speed of the Main Motor, the slack on the paper becomes
smaller.
The DC Controller detects the slack on paper by the Loop Sensor (SR616), and controls the rotation speed of the Fixing Motor.

40
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Fixing Motor rotates slower

than Main Motor.

M702

Fixing Motor

Pressure Roller

Fixing Film

SR616
Loop Sensor

DC
Controller

Paper

M701

Transfer Roller Main Motor

Photosensitive
Drum

Loop Sensor Lever

Fixing Motor rotates faster

than Main Motor.

M702

Fixing Motor

Pressure Roller

Fixing Film

SR616
Loop Sensor

Loop Sensor
DC
Lever
Controller

Paper

M701

Transfer Roller Main Motor

Photosensitive
Drum

Delivery Tray Full Detection

Description
The DC Controller detects paper full in the Delivery Tray using the Delivery Sensor (SR608).
The DC Controller judges that the Delivery Tray is full and notifies the Main Controller when the Delivery Sensor detects paper
for a specified period of time during printing.

41
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

'&ࢥࣥࢺ࣮࣮ࣟࣛ

᤼⣬ࢭࣥࢧ࣮
ࣉࣜࣥࢺ⏝⣬
㻿㻾㻢㻜㻤
᤼⣬ࢭࣥࢧ࣮ࣞࣂ࣮

᤼⣬ࢺࣞ࢖

Jam Detection
Description
The sensors are provided at the locations shown below to detect the presence of print paper and whether the print paper is being
fed correctly.

Simplex paper path

Duplex paper path

SR608

SR607

SR616

SR604
SR603

SR601
SR602

Code Name Code Name

SR601 Paper Width Sensor (Right) SR607 Fixing Delivery Sensor
SR602 Paper Width Sensor (Left) SR608 Delivery Sensor
SR603 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sen- SR616 Loop Sensor
sor
SR604 Registration Sensor

Occurrence of a jam is judged by whether paper is in the sensor area at the timings stored in the DC Controller.

42
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

When the DC Controller judges that a jam has occurred, the printing operation is stopped and the jam is notified to the Main
Controller at the same time.
The following shows the jams that are detected.

Jam name Description

Pickup Delay Jam 1 At paper pickup, the Registration Sensor (SR604) does not detect the paper leading edge although a
specified period of time has passed.
Pickup Delay Jam 2 At paper pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray, the Multi-purpose Pickup Sensor (SR603) does not detect
the paper leading edge although a specified period of time has passed.
Pickup Stationary Jam 1 The Registration Sensor (SR604) does not detect the paper trailing edge although a specified period of
time has passed since this sensor (SR604) detected the paper leading edge.
Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 The Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR607) does not detect the paper leading edge although a specified period
of time has passed since the Registration Sensor (SR604) detected this paper leading edge.
Fixing Delivery Stationary The Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR607) does not detect the paper trailing edge although a specified period
Jam 1 of time has passed since this sensor (SR607) detected the paper leading edge.
Internal Residual Jam 1 When any one of the following sensors detects presence of paper at power-on/door close. - Paper Width
Sensor (Right) (SR601), Paper Width Sensor (Left) (SR602), Registration Sensor (SR604), Fixing De-
livery Sensor (SR607), Delivery Sensor (SR608), Loop Sensor (SR616)
Internal Residual Jam 2 When the remaining paper is detected in the duplex reverse area while 2-sided printing. - Delivery Sensor
(SR608)
Internal Residual Jam 3 The time from when the Registration Sensor detected the paper leading edge until the OFF status of the
sensor was detected was shorter than the predetermined time. - Registration Sensor (SR604)
Internal Residual Jam 4 When any one of the following sensors detects presence of Paper at the end of initial rotation and last
rotation.
• Paper Width Sensor (Right) (SR601)
• Paper Width Sensor (Left) (SR602)
• Registration Sensor (SR604)
• Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR607)
• Delivery Sensor (SR608)
• Loop Sensor (SR616)
Door Open Jam 1 The door open was detected during printing and feeding paper.
Paper Wrapping Jam 1 The time from when the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR607) detected the paper leading edge until the OFF
status of the sensor was detected was shorter than the predetermined time.
Duplex Re-pickup Assembly At duplex printing, the Registration Sensor (SR604) does not detect the paper leading edge although a
Jam 1 specified period of time has passed since paper was reversed.
Delivery Delay Jam 1 When the Delivery Sensor (SR608) fails to detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period of
time after the Fixing Delivery Sensor (SR607) detects the trailing edge of paper.
Delivery Stationary Jam 1 When the Delivery Sensor (SR608) fails to detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period of
time after the Delivery Sensor (SR608) detects the leading edge of paper.

43
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

Fixing System

Functional Configuration
Overview
The fixing system forms a permanent image by melting the toner on the paper using pressure and heat.

Description
The fixing control circuit controls the temperature of the Fixing Assembly.
The Fixing Assembly of this machine uses the on-demand fixing method.

H1 Fixing Film

FU1

TH802 Pressure roller

Fixing temperature signal

Fixing heater control signal

Fixing heater Fixing heater

control circuit safety circuit

Fixing control circuit DC controller

Symbol Parts name

H1 Fixing Heater
TH802 Main Thermistor
FU1 Temperature Fuse

Temperature control of the Fixing Assembly which consists of these parts is performed by the Fixing Heater control circuit and
Fixing Heater safety circuit according to the command of the DC Controller.

Fixing Temperature Control

Overview
This control circuit controls the temperature such that the Fixing Heater reaches the target temperature.

44
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

AC input

Fixing unit Fixing power supply DC controller

Fixing film RL901

FU1 TH802 Frequency detection circuit FREQSNS

(200V model only)
H1
RLD+ Fixing heater
Relay control safety circuit
circuit

FSRD+
Pressure roller Fixing heater
control circuit FSRD-

MAINTH

Description
The DC Controller monitors the fixing temperature detection signal and outputs a fixing control signal according to the detected
temperature. The fixing control circuit controls the Fixing Heater on the basis of this signal, and controls the temperature of the
Fixing Heater to the target value.

Protection Function
Overview
This machine has a function to detect abnormal temperature rising in the Fixing Assembly and cut off the power supply to the
Fixing Heater.

Description
This machine has the following three protection functions to prevent abnormal temperature rising in the Fixing Heater.
• DC Controller
• Fixing Heater safety circuit
• Temperature Fuse
The following describes the details.

DC Controller
The DC Controller monitors the thermistor temperature of the Fixing Heater (Center). When it exceeds the specified
temperature, it is judged that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly is abnormally high, and the fixing control signal (FSRD)
output is stopped, the relay is turned OFF, and the power supply to the heater is turned OFF.

Fixing Heater safety circuit

The Fixing Heater safety circuit monitors the thermistor temperature of the Fixing Heater (Center). When it exceeds the
specified temperature, it is judged that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly is abnormally high, and the relay is turned
OFF and the power supply to the heater is turned OFF.

Temperature Fuse
If the temperature of the Fixing Heater rises abnormally and the temperature of the Fixing Fuse exceeds the specified
temperature, the Temperature Fuse opens and the power supply to the heater turns OFF.

Fixing Assembly Failure Detection

Overview
When the machine is under the following conditions, the DC Controller shuts down the power supply to the Fixing Assembly and
notifies an error.
• Startup failure

45
 2. Technical Explanation (Device)

• Abnormal high temperature failure

• Abnormal low temperature failure
• Fixing power supply drive circuit failure

Description
Fixing Assembly startup failure
An error code is notified if the Fixing Assembly does not reach a certain temperature within a specified period of time.

Abnormal high temperature failure

An error code is notified if an abnormally high temperature is detected in the Fixing Assembly.

Abnormal low temperature failure

An error code is notified if an abnormally low temperature is detected in the Fixing Assembly.

Fixing power supply drive circuit failure

An error code is notified if a zero cross signal is not detected for the specified period of time or more.

Error Code
E000: Startup failure
• E000-0000: Fixing Assembly startup failure
E001: Abnormal high temperature failure
• E001-0000: Abnormal high temperature of Fixing Assembly
E003: Abnormal low temperature failure
• E003-0000: Abnormal low temperature of Fixing Assembly
E004: Error in fixing power supply drive circuit
• E004-0000: Error in fixing power supply drive circuit

46
3 Technical
Explanation
(System)
Overview of System Management...... 48
Version Upgrade................................. 49
Setting Information Export/Import
Function (DCM)............................... 53
Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote)..................... 68
Security Functions...............................74
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Overview of System Management

This chapter describes information for service technicians on the system of this machine.
Although this chapter contains some information described in the User's Guide, for details on the functions for users, refer to the
e-Manual.

48
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Version Upgrade

Function Overview
The following firmware upgrade methods are available with this device.
Version upgrade using User Support Tool (UST).
Upgrade the firmware of the device using UST
Open the file for UST version upgrade on a PC connected with the device and upgrade the firmware.
Since the host machine and the PC are connected using a USB cable, version upgrades can be performed in an environment
where a network is not available.

Version upgrade via Internet

Access the dedicated server, and download and upgrade the firmware.
Provided that Internet connection is available, the system automatically configures the connection destination setting and
executes processing such as download and version upgrade.

Version upgrade using a USB flash drive (released only in special cases)
Upgrade the firmware of this machine using a USB flash drive.
Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to the device, and update the firmware in service mode.
Version upgrades can be performed in an environment where a PC or network is not available.

NOTE:
Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business,
and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of
the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive.

Version upgrade by replacing the PCB

Version upgrade by replacing the existing PCB with a PCB where the latest firmware is installed

Version upgrade using Local CDS

Use iW EMC/iW MC and DFU plug-in to download firmware from Local CDS and upgrade the host machine.

NOTE:
When using Local CDS to upgrade it, refer to the manual/material of iW EMC/iW MC DFU plug-in.

CAUTION:
A message appears when an attempt is made to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
This is a precaution not to use wrong firmware to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied.
See the following regarding the combination of whether the message will be displayed:

Type of firmware applied to the Firmware to upgrade

host machine General firmware Specified firmware
General firmware No message No message
Specified firmware Message displayed Message displayed

49
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Version Upgrade Using UST

UST is included in the firmware for the machine that can be downloaded from the website of CINC. Firmware is downloaded as
a zip file and a folder containing UST is extracted by decompressing the file.
When executing UST on the PC connected to the machine with a USB Cable, the firmware can be upgraded by downloading it
from the PC to the machine. For the detailed procedure, refer to "User Support Tool Operation Guide" stored in the decompressed
folder. "User Support Tool Operation Guide" is also available on the website of CINC.

PC
Firmware
Firmware

USB cable/
Network cable

Version Upgrade via Internet

Connect to the Internet using the network function of the device, and download and upgrade the latest firmware from the server.
If the device is in an environment where Internet connection is available, firmware versions can be upgraded only by operation
from the menu without using PC.

■ Prerequisite
In order to perform version upgrade of the device via Internet, the following conditions must be met.

There should be no other jobs being executed.

Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the
job and then perform the work.

The device should be able to be connected to the external network.

If connection is not available because, for example, there is a proxy server, follow the e-Manual to configure the proxy server
settings and enable connection to the external network.

The serial number of the host machine should be shown on the Main Controller PCB.
Whether or not the serial number of the host machine is shown on the Main Controller PCB can be checked from the Control
Panel or SPEC REPORT.

Procedure to check from SPEC REPORT

1. Execute the following service mode to print SPEC REPORT.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> SPEC

50
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

2. Check if the serial number ("3 alphabetical characters + 5-digit number" or "1-digit number + 2 alphabetical
characters + 5-digit number") is shown in [BODY No.] of the printed SPEC REPORT.

******************************
*** SPEC REPORT ***
******************************
Device Info ZZ999 Series
ROM Version
MAIN 00.75
BOOT 00.25
LANG 01.36
ECONT 00.10
PANEL 05.01
Device Code A0000000
Locale 9
Voltage TYpe 0
BODY No. ZZZ99999

Factory Flag 12345678

■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware via Internet

1. Select the following menu to upgrade the firmware via Internet:
• [Management Settings] > [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] > [Update Firmware] > [Via Internet] > [Yes]
When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.

2. Select the following menu, and check that the firmware has been correctly upgraded:
• [Management Settings] > [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] > [Update Firmware] > [Version Information]

CAUTION:
This function does not support the operations from remote UI. ( [Update Firmware] does not exist in the [System
Management Settings] menu of the remote UI.)

■ Messages
The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows.

No Error message The timing of oc- Remedy

. currence
1 Job in progress... Wait a moment, then try again. If there is a job being 1. Wait until the job is completed.
executed: 2. Cancel the job.
2 Cannot check the firmware version. (Server com- Network error 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
munication error.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3 Cannot download the firmware. (Error during 1. Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
download.) ternal network.
2. Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
case of access via a proxy server).
3. Check that the serial number of the host machine is
shown on the Main Controller PCB.
4 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** NETWORK AVAILA- If update (writing) of 1. Update the firmware again using UST.
BLE IP ADRESS IP address of the machine the firmware has
PRESS STOP KEY TO EXIT ended in failure:
5 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** FAILED TO UPDATE
6 ***DOWNLOAD MODE*** UPDATE IS COM- If the update of the -
PLETE firmware is suc-
cessful

Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special

Cases)
Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine, and update the firmware in service mode.

51
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

NOTE:
Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business,
and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of
the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive.

■ Prerequisite
In order to perform version upgrade of the machine using a USB flash drive, the following conditions must be met.

There should be no other jobs being executed.

Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the
job and then perform the work.

■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Using a USB Flash Drive

1. Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine.

2. Execute one of the following service modes.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD_FORCE

NOTE:
If you want to apply only firmware that is newer than the firmware currently applied in the machine, execute DOWNLOAD. If you
want to apply all the firmware contained in the USB flash drive regardless of whether it is newer or older, execute DOWNLOAD_
FORCE.

3. The signature data of the downloaded file is verified, and download instruction information is written to the
designated area of the flash memory only if the verification result is correct.

4. The machine is automatically restarted.

5. When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.

52
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)

Overview
Various data is stored in the storage inside the device.
Depending on the works to be done such as replacing parts, this data needs to be backed up and restored.
There are some ways to back up and restore data, and the appropriate one should be used depending on the purpose and storage
destination.
This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting values.
For the procedure for backing up and restoring other information, refer to the e-Manual.

■ Function Overview
This machine has a setting information export/import function (hereinafter referred to as DCM (Device Configuration Management)
function) which exports/imports the machine's setting value information as a file. The file exported/imported using the DCM
function is called a DCM file, and the target setting information is as follows:
• Setting information of the menu ([Settings/Registration] menu)
• Service mode setting information
• Address Book
The DCM file is exported to a USB flash drive or PC local disk from the Control Panel or remote UI.
The exported DCM file can be returned to the original device or imported to a different device.
When the file is returned to the original device, this can be used as a function to back up the settings, and when the file is imported
to a different device, this can be used as a function to copy setting information.
Data can also be imported to or exported from an iR-ADV machine by using iW EMC/MC DCM Plug-in.
In the case of the setting value backup function before implementation of the DCM function, an exported file could be imported
only to the same device, but the DCM function enables import of an exported file to a different device.

DCM support device DCM

DCM

USB memory
device DCM file
DCM file
DCM
DCM DCM support
Settings/
device
Registration DCM file
DCM file
Remote UI DCM

Service mode DCM

DCM

DCM file DCM support

iW EMC/MC
iR-ADV
with DCM Plug-in DCM file

Conceptual diagram

NOTE:
In order to export or import setting information using DCM, it is necessary that the device supports DCM.

■ Backup/Restoration for Service Technicians

Backup and Restoration from the Menu ([Settings/Registration] Menu)
Setting information can be backed up and restored from the Control Panel of the device or from the menu ([Settings/Registration]
menu) of remote UI.
Although the menu ([Settings/Registration] menu) is for users, the service mode settings information can be backed up and
restored from the Import/Export function by changing the service mode setting.
The service mode settings information can be backed up and restored only by accessing from the remote UI [Settings/Registration]
menu.

Backup/Restoration Using Service Mode

Some of the functions in service mode can be used to backup and restore data.
Setting value information and service counter (DC-CON) values can be backed up and restored.

53
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, and Storage

Locations
A DCM file is exported and imported using the Control Panel, remote UI, or the iW EMC server, depending on the situation of the
site.
The information exported/imported differs depending on the means.
Combinations of them are shown in the following table.

Menu used Operation Information exported Save destination

Setting values of Address book**1 Service mode set-
menu options ting
values
[Settings/Registra- Control panel Yes (fixed)*2 Yes (fixed)*2 No USB flash drive
tion] Remote UI Yes Yes PC local disk
With conditions*3
menu
Service mode Control panel No No Yes USB flash drive / Storage in the
host machine
Remote UI No No Yes Storage in the host machine

■ Compatibility of Data
The following table shows compatibility of data in the case where the device from which the data is exported and the device to
which the data is imported differ in model and/or serial number.
For items that are imported in Cases A, B, and C, refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 60.

Model Serial number Import process

Same Same Items corresponding to Case A are imported.*4
Same Different*5 Items corresponding to Case B are imported.*4
Different Different*5 Items corresponding to Case C are imported.*6
Different Same The file is judged to be invalid, and the process ends with an error.

■ Replacement Mode
When this function is used for migrating the setting data upon replacement of a device, some of the data cannot be migrated if
the model to which the data is migrated is different.
When this function is used in normal mode, data that is applicable to either Case B (of different serial number) or Case C (of
different model) cannot be imported.
When replacement mode is enabled on the device on the importing side, data can be forcibly migrated even to a device of a
different serial number or even between different models.

Normal mode Replace mode

Case A Case A

Case B Case B

Case C Case C

*1. Models without address books are excluded. In the case of a fax option model without SEND function, address books are
exported only if a fax option is connected with the device.
*2. When the [Settings/ Registration] menu is used from the Control Panel, both the setting menu information and the address book
are imported/exported. It is not possible to export/import only either of them.
Information which is not included in the data to be imported is not imported.
*3. Service mode is added to the data to be exported only when service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT is set.
For information on items that are imported, refer to "List of Items Which Can Be Imported".
*4. If the firmware version at the time of import differs from that at the time of export, predetermined corrective processing may be
performed.
*5. If a serial number is missing, the serial numbers are judged to be mismatched.
*6. Predetermined corrective processing may be performed.

54
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

The following shows the procedure to turn ON/OFF replacement mode of the device to which the migrating data is imported.

1. Set the following service mode setting value to "1(ON)" or "0(OFF)".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > RPL-IMP

CAUTION:
Since replacement mode is not lifted automatically, the setting value of the foregoing service mode needs to be changed
back to "0" to return to normal mode.

The targeted items of replacement mode are as follows.

List of Replacement Mode Targeted Items

User mode setting items Settings (* indicates default Remarks

values)
System settings
Device information settings
Device name 32 characters Model name is displayed as a default value.
Installation site 32 characters
Network settings
TCP/IP settings
IPv4 settings
IP address 0.0.0.0 *
IPv6 settings
Manual address settings
Use manual address OFF*/ON
Manual address IP address input screen
Prefix length (0 to *64 to 128)
Default router address Router address input screen
DNS settings
Use the same host/domain name as OFF/ON*
those of IPv4
Host name Enter the host name
Domain name Enter the domain name
mDNS Settings
mDNS Settings OFF/ON*
Use the same mDNS name as that OFF/ON*
of IPv4
mDNS name Enter the mDNS name
SMB settings
NetBIOS name NetBIOS name for own machine
(15 byte)
Workgroup name Belonging workgroup name (15
byte)
AirPrint settings
Installation site 32 characters Setting values to be referred are the same
as [Installation Site] in the [System Settings]

Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI

This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting information by using the [Import/Export]
function in the [Settings/Registration] menu of Remote UI.

55
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

CAUTION:
• The service mode setting information can be backed up and restored only from the [Settings/Registration] menu on
Remote UI, and the operation cannot be performed from the [Settings/Registration] menu on the Control Panel.
• In the case of backing up and restoring only the setting information of the [Settings/Registration] menu or the address
book, refer to the procedure described in the e-Manual.

■ Limitations
The following limitations exist when backing up and restoring the service mode settings information from the [Settings/
Registrations] menu of remote UI.

A job must not be accepted during an import/export processing.

Except for the calibration requested by the engine, a job is not allowed to be accepted during a processing. In addition, import/
export must not be performed during execution of a job.

Firmware must not be updated during an import/export processing.

Fax cannot be received while firmware is updated during a processing. In addition, import/export must not be performed also
during firmware update.

Power must not be turned off during an import/export processing.

If power discontinuity occurs during an import processing, a rollback processing is not performed, therefore the settings
imported up to that point are reflected while the rest of the settings remain as-is.
When power discontinuity occurs during an export processing, export is not executed.

■ Procedure for Export from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)

Service mode setting information can be exported from the [System Management Settings] menu by setting the following service
mode setting value to "1".

1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Settings/Registration] > [Import/Export] > [Export]

56
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

3. After confirming that [Service Mode] is displayed/selected in [Select Item to Export], enter the password and click
[Start Exporting].

Address Book
Select the check box to export the address book data.

Settings/Registration
Select this check box to import the menu option data.

Encryption password
Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.

4. The file download dialog box will appear. Save the file to any location.

5. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

CAUTION:
Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting
value: 0).

■ Procedure for Import from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu)

Import the service mode setting information file that was exported in the previous procedure.

1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

2. Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
• [Settings/Registration] > [Import/Export] > [Import]

57
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

3. Configure the import settings, and click [Start Importing].

Entering the password and clicking [Start Importing] imports the menu option data.

[Browse...] button
Click to select the file to import.

Decryption password
Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.
Address Book
Select the check box to import the address book data.

Settings/Registration
Select this check box to import the menu option data.

4. Click [OK] when a dialog box confirming whether you want to execute the import process is displayed.

5. When a message indicating completion of the processing appears, click [OK].

6. Restart this machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected. This completes the
procedure for importing a setting information file.

7. Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".

• COPIER > OPRION > USER > SMD-EXPT

CAUTION:
Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting
value: 0).

58
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information

Service mode setting information can be backed up and restored by using service mode functions. The backup file can be saved
to a USB flash drive or a storage in the machine.

Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive

COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > EXPORT
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > IMPORT

Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine

COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > SAVE-SM
COPIER > FUNCTION >SYSTEM > RSTR-SM

Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine

Storage destination USB flash drive Storage in the machine
Number of files saved Depends on the capacity of the USB flash drive One
Duplication of the setting Possible Not possible
values for other machines

■ Procedure for Exporting to a USB Flash Drive

Use the service mode function to save the service mode setting information to a USB flash drive.
This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI.
The following USB flash drives can be used for export/import.
• USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
• USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
Note that the descriptions in parenthesis in the procedure are the descriptions in the case of remote UI.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.

2. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT

CAUTION:
Even if the service mode is executed without connecting a USB flash drive, an error is not displayed.
It looks as if the process has been completed successfully, but the file has not been exported to anywhere.
For the reason shown above, be sure to check before execution that a USB flash drive is connected.

3. The message displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to the original state,
remove the USB flash drive.

4. Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the root of the USB flash
drive.
This completes the export of a setting information file.

■ Procedure for Import from USB Flash Drive

1. Save the setting information file (service.dcm) to be imported to directly under the root of the USB flash drive.

2. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.

3. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT

4. The message displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to the original state,
remove the USB flash drive.

5. Restart this machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected.
This completes the the import of a setting information file.

59
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Backup Procedure to the Storage in the Machine

Use the service mode function to back up the service mode setting information to the storage in the machine.
This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI.
The setting information that can be saved in the machine's storage is only one.

1. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > SAVE-SM

2. Backup process is complete after checking that the message displayed during the process disappears and the
display returns to the original state.

■ Procedure for Restoration from Internal Storage

Restore the service mode setting information that has been backed up to the storage in the machine in the previous procedure.

1. Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSTR-SM

2. Restoration process is complete after checking that the message displayed during the process disappears and the
display returns to the original state.

List of Items Which Can Be Imported

The following shows items to be imported for this function.
Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below:
• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (e.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
using service mode)
• Not included in the import coverage (Cases A to C)
• There are no options and functions related to setting values
The import coverage shown in the table below is as shown below. Those that are not described here cannot be imported.

Import coverage Description

Case A: The same machine Import to the same machine (for backup and restoration, etc.)
Case B: The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series)
Case C: Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)

NOTE:
This list is the common list for this function.
Therefore, this list may contain some items that are not supported by this function.

■ Service Mode Settings

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFY Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFX Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFYR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFXR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1Y Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1X Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1YR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1XR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2Y Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2X Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2YR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2XR Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-Y Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-M Yes - -

60
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-C Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ DEV-HV-K Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR2SF-HV Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ TR2BK-HV Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ ICL-HV Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST VIFADJ FU-TMP Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-Y0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-M0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-C0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-K0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-Y1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-M1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-C1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-K1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-Y2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-M2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-C2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR SUB-S-K2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-Y0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-M0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-C0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-K0 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-Y1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-M1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-C1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-K1 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-Y2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-M2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-C2 Yes - -
COPIER ADJUST SCNR MAI-S-K2 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC SMEAR-PV Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC FEED-IMP Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC FOG-PV Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION VIFFNC ICL-IMP Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL14159 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL37510 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL65677 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL68676 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL68677 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL25607 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL93822 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL78788 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL71100 *1 Yes - -
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL00171 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL80100 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SPLMAN SPL84194 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL ERDS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-CMD5 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLN Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

61
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-LGN Yes - -
COPIER OPTION BODY SLPMODE Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW IMGCNTPR Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRG-PROC Yes Yes -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRGLF-K Yes Yes -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CRGLF-CL Yes Yes -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CRGLW-LV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-BK Yes - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-CMY Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER5 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER6 Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER SMD-EXPT Yes - -
COPIER OPTION USER ACC-SLP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Yes - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW01 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW02 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW03 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW04 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW05 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW06 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW07 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW08 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW09 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW10 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW11 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW12 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW13 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW14 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW15 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW16 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW17 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW18 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW19 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW20 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW21 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW22 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW23 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW24 *1 - Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

62
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
Fax SSSW SW25 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW26 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW27 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW28 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW29 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW30 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW31 *1 - Yes - -
Fax SSSW SW32 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 005 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 006 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 007 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 008 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 009 *1 - Yes - -
Fax MENU 010 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 002 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 003 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 004 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 005 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 006 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 008 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 010 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 011 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 012 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 013 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 015 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 016 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 017 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 018 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 019 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 020 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 021 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 022 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 023 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 024 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 025 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 026 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 027 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 029 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 049 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 051 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 053 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NUM 054 *1 - Yes - -
Fax NCU TONE 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU TONE 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PULSE FORM *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PULSE 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PULSE 002 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

63
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
Fax NCU PULSE 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PULSE 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU DIALTONE 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU 2ND DLTN 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE0 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU BUSTONE1 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU REORDRTN 008 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

64
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
Fax NCU AUTO RX 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU AUTO RX 009 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 009 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 011 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU CNGDTCT 012 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW01 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW02 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW03 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW04 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW05 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW06 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW07 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW08 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW09 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW10 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW11 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW12 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW13 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW14 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW15 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW16 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW17 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW18 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW19 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW20 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW21 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW22 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW23 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW24 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW25 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW26 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW27 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW28 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW29 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALB SW30 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

65
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
Fax NCU SPECIALN 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 009 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 011 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 012 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 013 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 014 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 015 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 016 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 017 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 019 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 020 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 024 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 025 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 026 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 027 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 030 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 040 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 041 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 042 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 044 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 045 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 046 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 047 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 048 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 065 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU SPECIALN 066 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU RKEY 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU RKEY 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 005 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXDIALT 008 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT BIT *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 001 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 002 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 003 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 004 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 005 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

66
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 006 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 007 *1 Yes - -
Fax NCU PBXBUSYT 008 *1 Yes - -

*1. FAX model only

67
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)

Overview of System
■ Function Overview
E-RDS (Embedded RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by
making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal
Gateway Server) via Internet.
The information to be monitored is:
• Billing counter
• Parts counter
• ROM version
• Service call error log
• Jam log
• Alarm log
• Change of status (such as status of consumables)
Since the information shown above is customer information, HTTPS/ SOAP protocol is used for communication between the
UGW server and the host machine to improve security.

Customer
UGW
Environment This machine

Internet
㻲㼕㼞㼑㼣㼍㼘㼘

Sales Company

DNS Server Proxy Server Administrator

■ Features
E-RDS is embedded in the network module of the device, and the front-end module of the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system is realized without requiring hardware besides the device.

■ Main Functions
Functional cat- Sub category Description
egory
Communication Test By executing the following service mode, E-RDS communicates with UGW, retrieves
Test schedule information, and establish communication.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-TEST
Transmission of Billing/all resources/parts/ E-RDS Periodically send billing/all resources/parts/mode-by-mode counters to the
counters mode-by-mode counters server.
Transmission of Service call/alarm/jam log Each time a service call, alarm, or jam log occurs, the error log is sent to the server.
event logs Having alarm log or not is different by a model.
Data transmis- ROM version / Device configu- E-RDS periodically sends the firmware information of the device to UGW. E-RDS
sion ration sends the device configuration information only when there is any change in the
configuration.
E-RDS Debug log Debug logs of E-RDS are stored in E-RDS, and they are sent to UGW only when
they exceed a specific size.
Repair request E-RDS sends error information (image failure, jams or others) according to the in-
struction of the user.
Sublog transmission When E-RDS catches the sublog transmission of a message designation than UGW,
send data such as device Sublogs and DCON logs to the server.

68
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Functional cat- Sub category Description

egory
Operation in- Operation check E-RDS contacts UGW to check if there is processing to be executed next, and re-
struction ceives the following instructions if any.
• Linkage with CDS
• Sublog transmission

Servicing Notes
• After clearing the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-
TEST) need to be performed. If this work is omitted, an error may occur when counters are sent to UGW.
After replacing the Main Controller PCB, all the settings need to be reconfigured.
• Do not change the values of the following service modes unless otherwise instructed.
If they are changed, a communication error will occur with UGW.
• Port number of UGW
[COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default: 443
• If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device becomes invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting
(E-RDS: 0).
• When the E-RDS function is enabled, a communication test can be performed from [Check Counter] of the Control Panel of
the host machine. *1
When conducting a communication test from [Check Counter], pay attention to the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from [Check Counter], do not conduct a
communication test from the other. This operation is not guaranteed.

Setting Procedure
■ Preparation
Since this function communicates with the UGW server, it is necessary to connect to the external network.
Check the following items, and make the settings if not yet set.
• IP address settings
• DNS server settings
• Proxy server settings*2
• Installation of CA certificate (arbitrary *3 )

CAUTION:
• Obtain the information on the network environment from the system administrator of the user.
• When having changed the network settings, turn OF and then ON the main power of the machine.

■ Procedure for Setting E-RDS

1. In the following service mode, select the following service mode to initialize the E-RDS setting values:
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT

NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of“Setting values and data to be initialized” on page 70 .

*1. The user can perform a communication test or browse the result of communication test.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (hexadecimal number, 8 digit) is displayed on the Control Panel.
*2. If authentication is necessary, make the settings of the authentication information as well.
*3. When using a certificate other than those pre-installed in the device

69
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

2. Enable the E-RDS function in the following service mode, and perform a communication test.
1. Select the following item:
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
2. Enter [1] from the keyboard, and press [Apply].

CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

When the E-RDS function is enabled, the function to communicate with UGW is enabled.

3. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [Yes].

If the communication is successful, "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, check the network settings and USW server
address (URL).

CAUTION:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-LOG. By performing the communication
test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.

Maintenace
■ Initializing E-RDS settings
It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.

● Initialization procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to initialize E-RDS.

1. Enter service mode as a system administrator user.

2. Select the following service mode, and press [OK] to execute.

• COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT

● Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ERDS
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > COM-LOG

CAUTION:
If a certificate other than the CA certificate at the time of shipment has been installed, initializing the E-RDS setting will not
change the settings back to those at the time of shipment. To change the certificate back to the CA certificate at the time
of shipment, delete the certificate (install the CA certificate at the time of shipment) after initializing the E-RDS settings.

■ Report Output of Communication Error Log (COM-LOG)

A report of communication error log information on five affairs can be output.

● Report output procedure

1. Select the following service mode, and press [Yes].
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ERDS-LOG

70
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

12/09 2015 10:14AM

****************************
*** E-RDS-COM-LOG***
****************************
No.01 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.02 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:21 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.03 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.
No.04 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 03:18 AM CODE 00000000
Information SUSPEND: mode changed.
No.05 DATE 12/09 2015 TIME 01:56 AM CODE 05000003
Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.

Output sample

Error Message List

Error information displayed on the communication error log detail screen is shown below.
(The "server" described here means UGW.)

Code Character strings Cause Remedy

0000 SUSPEND: mode changed. Operation mode mismatch Execute initialization of the E-RDS settings
0000 (ERDS-DAT).
0500 SUSPEND: Communication test E-RDS was enabled, but the main power of Perform and complete a communication test
0003 is not performed. the device was turned OFF and then ON (COM-TEST).
without performing a communication test.
0xxx 0003 Server schedule is not exist The schedule does not exist. Perform and complete a communication test
(COM-TEST).
0xxx 0003 Communication test is not per- Communication test has not been comple- Perform and complete a communication test
formed ted. (COM-TEST).
84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is setted OFF E-RDS is not enabled. Set the value of the E-RDS setting (E-RDS)
to 1, and perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
8600 Event Registration is Failed Processing in the device (event processing) Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de-
0002 failed. vice. If the error occurs again after turning
8600 OFF and then ON the power, replace the
0003 system software of the device (version up-
8600 grade).
0101
8600
0201
8600
0305
8600
0306
8600
0401
8600
0403
8600
0414
8600
0415
8700 SRAM version unmatch! An invalid value has been entered at the Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de-
0306 beginning of the NVMEM area of E-RDS vice.
(nonvolatile memory area).
8700 SRAM AeRDS version unmatch! An invalid value has been entered at the Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de-
0306 beginning of the NVMEM area of E-RDS vice.
(nonvolatile memory area).

71
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Code Character strings Cause Remedy

8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported The user tried to execute a method which is Collect Sublog and contact the Support
not supported by E-RDS. Dept. of the sales company.
8xxx 0101 Server response error ( NULL ) UGW reply error: Processing of the UGW Perform and complete a communication test
error code failed. (COM-TEST).
8xxx 0201 Server schedule is invalid The schedule specified by UGW is invalid. Report the detailed information at the time of
8xxx 0202 occurrence of the error to the Support Dept.
8xxx 0203 Perform a remedy on the UGW side, and
8xxx 0204 then perform a communication test again.
8xxx 0206
8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is broken The internal schedule of E-RDS is invalid. Perform and complete a communication test
8xxx 0208 (COM-TEST).
8xxx 0221 Server specified list is too big The information the UGW server instructed There is a problem with the alarm filter set for
to send for the alert code/alarm code filter UGW. Contact the Support Dept. of the sales
function is invalid. company.
8xxx 0222 Server specified list is wrong The information the UGW server instructed There is a problem with the alarm filter set for
to send for the alert code/alarm code filter UGW. Contact the Support Dept. of the sales
function is invalid. company.
8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try later A semaphore consumption error occurred Wait for a while and then perform a commu-
during a communication test. nication test again.
8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not match When the firmware is updated, the tracking Collect Sublog and send it to the Support
ID in the reply of Updater differs from that Dept. of the sales company.
specified by UGW.
8xxx 2000 Unknown error Other communication errors Perform and complete a communication test
(COM-TEST).
8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later After the main power of the device is turned Check the connection status of the network.
OFF and then ON, a communication test Perform a communication test (COM-TEST)
was performed with the network not ready. 60 seconds after turning ON the power of the
device.
8xxx 2004 Server response error ([hexadec- UGW reply error: Communication to UGW Wait for a while and then try again. Check the
imal]) [detailed error information has succeeded, but an error occurred and error code (in hex notation) and the details of
on the server side] UGW returned an error. the error (detailed error information on the
server side) from UGW displayed after the
message.
8xxx 200A Server connection error UGW connection error: • Check the connection status of the net-
• TCP/IP communication failed. work.
• The IP address of the device has not • If proxy is used, configure the proxy set-
been set. tings and check the status of the proxy
server.
8xxx 200B Server address resolution error UGW address resolution error • Check that Internet connection is avail-
able in the environment.
8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error The address is invalid and connection to the Check the address/port of the proxy server,
proxy server fails. and configure the settings again.
8xxx 2015 Proxy address resolution error Proxy address name resolution error • Check the host name and the DNS set-
tings of the proxy server.
• Set the proxy server using the IP ad-
dress.
8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication error Check the user name and password for log-
ging in to the proxy, and configure the set-
tings again.
8xxx 2028 Server certificate error • The root certificate for the server has • Install the latest device system software
not been registered on the device. (upgrade the version).
• The user has used another certificate • Set the correct date and time on the de-
and the correct certificate file has not vice.
been registered. • Execute CLEAR > CA-KEY, and turn
• The date and time of the device is cor- OFF and then ON the power of the de-
rect. vice (automatic installation of the CA
certificate at the time of shipment).

72
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Code Character strings Cause Remedy

8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired • The root certificate registered on the Set the correct date and time on the device.
device has expired. If the date and time set on the device is cor-
• The root certificate registered by the rect, upgrade the version to the latest sys-
user at first is used and the correct cer- tem.
tificate has not been registered.
• The date of the device is outside the
validity period.
8xxx 2047 Server response time out UGW reply time-out If this occurs during a communication test,
wait for a while and then perform a commu-
nication test (COM-TEST) again.
8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client failed to obtain SOAPRes- Perform and complete a communication test
ponse. It may be caused by a problem on (COM-TEST).
the server side or a temporary problem in
network load, etc.
8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP error (SOAP Fault) Check that the value of the port number of
UGW (RGW- PORT) is 443.
xxxx xxxx Device internal error Device internal error Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de-
vice. Or, replace the system software of the
device (version upgrade).
xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure! Internal error at startup of E-RDS Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de-
vice.

73
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

Security Functions
A technical description on the security-related functions implemented in this equipment and the works to be performed for servicing
are shown below.

Security Policy Function

What is security policy function?
The security policy function is a function for collectively configuring the security-related settings on devices located at various
places.
If the user has security policies such as information security basic policies and security standards, the settings can be collectively
configured/managed in accordance with the security policies.

DCM
Plug-in
Data
Security policy settings

Security policy settings

Perform either of the following works to configure the security policies on this equipment.
• Using iW EMC DCM Plug-in, distribute the security policy settings created by an iR ADVANCE third generation device.
• Import the DCM file exported from a device of the same series where the security policy settings have already been enabled.

Export/import from remote UI

DCM Obtain/distribute by executing
Plug-in a DCM Plug-in task

Data

DCM files
Data

DCM file
iR ADVANCE
third generation
Device of this series
with the security policy
This equipment ith the security policy
settings configured
settings configured

NOTE:
Security policy settings can be configured on devices of this series only by distributing the settings using iW EMC DCM Plug-in.
A DCM file imported from a device of this series where the security policy settings have been configured can be used to configure
the settings, but the original device where the settings have been configured can be created only by using iW EMC DCM Plug-in.
In iR ADVANCE series, the security policy function is implemented only in the third generation devices.

■ Security Administrator
● Differences between Security Administrator and System Manager
In the security policy setting function, there is an administrator called a "security administrator" in addition to the conventional
"system manager".

74
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

The system manager can operate/set all the items in the [Settings/Registration] menu of the device.
However, if the security policy has been set by the security administrator described later, even the system manager cannot perform
operation or change the settings against the security policy.
The security administrator is an administrator who creates, applies, edits, backs up, and restores the security policy.
The security administrator is a system manager and is a user who knows the password for the security policy settings.

Account [Settings/Registration] menu Policy-related

Add/ Settings Settings Initialize Initialize Intro- Browse Back up/ Disable
delete (Adminis- (Other (User (Service duce/ restore the re-
trator set- than the mode) mode) change strictions
tings) adminis-
trator set-
tings)
Security administrator *1 *1 -
System manager *1 *1 - - - -
End user - - *1 - - - - - -
Service technician - - - - - -

● Security Administrator Password

The security administrator password is a password that is set to protect the configured security policy. The password setting is
not mandatory.

Behavior when the security administrator password has been set

If the security administrator password has been set on this equipment, the security administrator password is required when
[Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed. This is intended to prevent the device from being initialized without discretion and
the configured security policy from being disabled.

NOTE:
Even if the security administrator password has not been set, as long as the security policy has been configured, [Management
Settings] > [Data Management] > [Initialize Menu] is grayed out and cannot be used.

Importing the security administrator password

If a security policy setting file of iR ADVANCE series where the security administrator password has been set is imported
via iW EMC DCM Plug-in, the security administrator password is not reflected.
In the case of importing the file via iW EMC DCM Plug-in, it is necessary to execute [Create Task to Change Security Policy
Password] and distribute the security administrator password to set the security administrator password.

Setting informationand
the security administrator password
Data
Export Import

DCM ファイル
DCM file
Model of the same series This equipment

Setting information
Distribute the setting information
DCM
Plug-in
Administrator
DCM ファイルpassword
Distribute the administrator password

This equipment

Initializing the security administrator password

In case the user has forgotten the security administrator password, there is a service mode setting for initializing the password.
Execute the service mode shown below to initialize the security administrator password set on this equipment.
Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > PLPW-CLR

*1. Restrained by the policy

75
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

■ Screen Displayed When Security Policy Is Applied

If the security policy is applied, the message shown below appears when you access the [Settings/Registration] screen.

Example of the remote UI screen

Some settings are in read-only mode

because the security settings are enabled.
Only the current settings can be selected.
Some settings are in
read-only mode
because the security
settings are enabled

Example of the Control Panel (Touch Panel) screen

If the security administrator password has been set, the security administrator password is required when [Initialize All Data/
Settings] is executed.

En t e r Se c u ri t y Ad m i n i s t ra to r Pa s s wo rd

q w e r t y u i o p -

Security Adm. Password a s d f g h j k l

<Apply> @ z x c v b n m , . /
Entry Mode: A
Symbol a 1/# Space

Apply

Security administrator password entry screen

■ Checking the Configured Settings

The policy settings that have been configured can be checked on the remote UI screen shown below.

1. Start remote UI as a user having the administrator privileges.

76
 3. Technical Explanation (System)

2. Display the screen shown below.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Confirm Security Policy]

Screen example

NOTE:
On the [Confirm Security Policy] screen, all the settings related to security policies are displayed regardless of the model.
Therefore, policy settings related to functions that are not implemented in the model are also displayed.
For example, the models of this series do not have the SMB server function, but [Restrict SMB Port] is displayed.

■ Export/Import of Setting Information

For the procedure for exporting/importing setting information, refer to the User's Guide of this equipment or the User's Guide of
iW EMC DCM Plug-in.

77
4 Periodical Service
Periodically Replaced Parts................ 79
Consumable Parts...............................80
Periodical Services..............................81
 4. Periodical Service

Periodically Replaced Parts

This machine does not have any periodically replaced parts.

79
 4. Periodical Service

Consumable Parts
This machine does not have any consumable parts.

80
 4. Periodical Service

Periodical Services
This machine does not require any periodical service.

81
5 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
List of Parts......................................... 83
External Cover System....................... 89
Original Exposure/Feed System....... 100
Controller System..............................124
Image Formation System.................. 139
Fixing System....................................145
Pickup Feed Delivery System........... 148
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Parts

Major Units
■ ADF/Reader

[1]

[2]

No. Name
1 ADF Unit
2 Reader Unit

83
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Host Machine

[1]
[3]

[2]

[6] [5]

[4]

[7]

[8]

[9]

No. Name
[1] Control Panel Unit
[2] ITB Unit
[3] Fixing Assembly
[4] Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
[5] Duplex Reverse Drive Unit
[6] Rear Cover Unit
[7] Secondary Transfer Feed Unit
[8] Pickup Guide
[9] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Main Drive Assembly.

84
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Layout Drawing of Electrical Components

■ ADF/Reader

M11
SR9
SR10

CIS

Electric code Name

M11 ADF Motor
CIS Contact Image Sensor (ADF CIS)
SR9 Document Sensor
SR10 Document End Sensor

UN40

SR11 CIS

M5

Electric code Name

M5 Reader Motor
CIS Contact Image Sensor (Reader CIS)
SR11 CIS HP Sensor
UN40 Connecting Relay PCB

85
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Motor/Fan

M702

M701

M703 FM1

M704

Electric code Name

FM1 Main Fan
M701 Main Motor
M702 Fixing Motor
M703 Pickup Motor
M704 Scanner Motor

■ Heater

TH802

H801/ H802

Electric code Name

H801 Fixing Heater (120V)
H802 Fixing Heater (200V)
TH802 Thermistor

86
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Switch/Solenoid

SL714

SL713

SW2 SW1
SL711
SW3
SL712
SW5

SW4

Electric code Name

SL711 Developing Separation Solenoid
SL712 Pickup Solenoid
SL713 Duplex Re-pickup Solenoid
SL714 Duplex Reverse Solenoid
SW1 Developing HP Switch
SW2 Fixing Pressure Release Switch
SW3 Rear Door Switch (Left)
SW4 Front Door Switch
SW5 MP Pickup Switch

■ Sensor

SR608
SR607
SR616 SR601

SR602 SR603
SR604
UN4

UN3

87
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Electric code Name

SR601 Paper Width Sensor (Right)
SR602 Paper Width Sensor (Left)
SR603 MP Pickup Sensor
SR604 Registration Sensor
SR607 Fixing Delivery Sensor
SR608 Delivery Sensor
SR616 Arch Sensor
UN3 Density Sensor
UN4 Color Displacement Sensor

■ PCB

UN31
UN41
UN42

UN39 UN35
UN32 UN33
UN30 UN5

UN1
UN8

UN7
UN38
UN2

Electric code Name

UN1 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
UN2 Engine Controller PCB
UN5 Power Switch PCB
UN7 Environment Sensor
UN8 Laser Driver/ BD PCB
UN30 Main Controller PCB
UN31 Touch Panel Main PCB
UN32 USB PCB
UN33 Panel LED PCB
UN35 Wireless LAN PCB
UN38 NCU PCB (Only for FAX Model)
UN39 Off-hook PCB (Only for FAX Model)
UN41 LCD
UN42 Touch Panel

88
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

External Cover System

Removing the Toner Cartridge

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the Photosensitive Drum.

• Be sure to cover the drums with paper to block light.

1. Pull out the Cartridge Tray, and remove the Toner Cartridges (Y, M, C, and Bk).

89
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Left Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

■ Procedure
1. Shift the host machine by approximately 70 mm from the working table to release the claws on the bottom of the
Left Cover.

70 mm

70 mm

2. Pull out the cassette by approximately 80 mm.

CAUTION:
Do not completely pull out the cassette, as doing so will disturb the balance of the product and may cause it to fall down.

80 mm

90
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Open the Cartridge Cover and the Rear Cover Unit, and remove the screws.

1x

4. Free the bosses and claws, and remove the Left Cover.

3x 7x

5. Shift the host machine back to the center of the working table to prevent it from falling down.

Removing the Right Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

91
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Shift the host machine by approximately 50 mm from the working table to release the claws on the bottom of the
Right Cover.

50 mm

50 mm

2. Pull out the cassette by approximately 80 mm.

CAUTION:
Do not completely pull out the cassette, as doing so will disturb the balance of the product and may cause it to fall down.

80 mm

92
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Open the Cartridge Cover and the Rear Cover Unit, and remove the screws. Close the Secondary Transfer Unit.

1x

4. Release the claws while opening the Right Cover in the direction of the arrow.

1x

3x 6x

93
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Free the bosses and claw, and remove the Right Cover.

1x

1x

6. Shift the host machine back to the center of the working table to prevent it from falling down.

Removing the Rear Cover Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the Rear Cover Unit, and close the Secondary Transfer Unit.

94
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the 2 holders.

2x

3. Remove the shaft.

1x

4. Remove the Rear Cover Unit.

Removing the Cartridge Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

95
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Open the Cartridge Cover, release the Cartridge Cover Retainers (right and left), and remove the Cartridge Cover.

2x 2x

Removing the Cartridge Tray

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Cartridge Cover ” on page 95

■ Procedure
1. After pulling out the Cartridge Tray, lift up the Cartridge Door Links on the right and left.

96
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the pin from the groove of the left side rail while lifting up the left side of the Cartridge Tray, and turn the
Cartridge Tray counterclockwise to remove the tray.

NOTE:
When installing the Cartridge Tray, raise the right and left links, insert the pin in the rail groove on the right side of the tray, and
then do the same on the left side. Next, lower the right and left Cartridge Door Links, and insert the Cartridge Tray in all the way.

Removing the Upper Left Front Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

97
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Left Front Cover.

2x

Removing the Upper Right Front Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Right Front Cover.

2x

Removing the Right Front Upper Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

98
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. “Removing the Upper Right Front Cover” on page 98

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Front Upper Cover.

1x

Removing the Upper Cover Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Upper Left Front Cover” on page 97

6. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

7. “Removing the Upper Right Front Cover” on page 98

8. “Removing the Right Front Upper Cover” on page 98

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Upper Cover Unit.

7x

99
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Original Exposure/Feed System

Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Remove the screws.

3x
1x

2. Disconnect the cables.

1x

2x

4x

1x

100
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the ADF Unit + Reader Unit.

Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

■ Procedure
1. Place the ADF Unit and Reader Unit opened as shown in the figure below.

2. Remove the screws, pull the cables out from the cover, and remove the Reader Unit Lower Cover.

3x

1x

101
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the screws, disconnect the Flat Cables, and free the harness from the guide.

2x
3x

1x

4. Remove the Inner Cover, and free the Flat Cable and the 2 Grounding Wires (secured together with a screw).

3x 1x

102
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5. Lift up the ADF Unit, and remove it from the Reader Unit in the direction of the arrow.

NOTE:
The ADF Unit can only be removed from the Reader Unit if it is opened to the position indicated by the arrow [A], as it has two
claws.

2x

[A]

6. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the ADF Unit” on page 170“After Replacing the Reader Unit” on page
179

Removing the ADF Roller Unit

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller.

1. Open the ADF Upper Cover.

103
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the gear and the bushing.

1x

3. Remove the E-ring, and move the bushing.

104
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the E-ring and the bushing, and remove the ADF Roller Unit.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose the spring attached to the ADF Roller Unit.

NOTE:
When installing, match the spring of the ADF Roller Unit to the boss.

Removing the ADF Pickup Roller

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the ADF Roller Unit” on page 103

105
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller.

1. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller Unit.

2. Remove the ADF Pickup Roller.

Removing the ADF Separation Roller

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the ADF Roller Unit” on page 103

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the roller.

106
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

1. Remove the bushing and 2 E-rings.

2. Move the Roller Shaft, and remove the Parallel Pin.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose the Parallel Pin during installation/removal.

3. Turn the Roller Shaft in the direction of the arrow, and remove it after aligning the protrusion with the hole on the
Roller Holder.

107
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the ADF Separation Roller.

Removing the ADF Separation Pad Unit

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller/pad.

1. Open the ADF Upper Cover.

2. Remove the ADF Separation Pad Unit.

2x

108
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF Upper Cover.

2. Lift the ADF Tray until it stops and release the shaft and hook, and then make the tray stand upright and remove it
upward.

109
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Release the hooks, and remove the ADF Front Cover in the direction of the arrow.

2x

4. Release the boss, and remove the ADF Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow.

5. Remove the screws, and remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.

5x

110
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit.

Removing the ADF Feed Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit” on page 109

■ Procedure
1.

2.

2x

111
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3.

4.

2x

3x

5.

6.

1x

112
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7.

4x

Removing the ADF CIS (For the duplex scanning model)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit” on page 109

■ Procedure
1.

1x

2x

2.

113
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3.

1x

4.

114
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose the springs.

CAUTION:
When installing the ADF CIS Unit, be careful that the Guide Sheet does not get caught in the interior.

115
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

6. Place the ADF CIS Unit on clean paper with the glass surface side down.

7. Remove the ADF CIS Unit Holder.

8. Remove the ADF CIS.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the sensor of the ADF CIS.

9. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the ADF CIS Unit” on page 186

Removing the ADF Drive Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the ADF Upper Cover Unit” on page 109

2. “Removing the ADF Feed Unit” on page 111

116
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

1. Remove the Leaf Spring.

NOTE:
Be sure to avoid touching grease as grease is applied to the A part.

1x

[A]

2. Remove the Pressure Release Lever.

2x

117
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Remove the ADF Drive Unit.

2x

NOTE:
When installing the ADF Drive Unit, mount the lever on the bush.

Removing the Reader Upper Cover Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 101

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
• Since the Copyboard Glass is included in the Reader Upper Cover Unit, replace the entire Reader Upper Cover Unit
when replacing the Copyboard Glass.

118
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

1. Remove the Reader Upper Cover Unit.

CAUTION:
Do not touch the Copyboard Glass with your hands, as doing so will attach skin oil on it and cause image failure from soiling.
If soiling is attached, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened.

2x

7x

2. Actions after replacement:“After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit” on page 175

Removing the Reader CIS

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 101

6. “Removing the Reader Upper Cover Unit” on page 118

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Reader CIS Spacer.

119
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Flat Cable, and remove the Reader CIS Mounting Base from the Timing Belt.

1x

120
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

3. Lift up the Reader CIS, and remove it in the direction of the arrow. Be careful not to lose the springs.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the sensor of the Reader CIS.

CAUTION:
When installing the Reader CIS, align the 2 shafts on the right and left, and confirm that the protrusions and grooves are
properly fitted.

4. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the Reader CIS Unit” on page 172

121
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Reader CIS Timing Belt

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 101

6. “Removing the Reader Upper Cover Unit” on page 118

7. “Removing the Reader CIS” on page 119

■ Procedure

1. Remove the [A] part of the belt from the gear.

[A]

Removing the Reader Scanner Motor

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Separating the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 101

6. “Removing the Reader Upper Cover Unit” on page 118

7. “Removing the Reader CIS” on page 119

8. “Removing the Reader CIS Timing Belt” on page 122

122
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector and free the harness from the Harness Guide on the back side of the Reader Unit.

1x

1x

2. Turn it over so that the front side is facing up, and remove the Sensor Mounting Base.

1x

3. Remove the Motor Unit.

2x

1x

123
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Controller System

Removing the Controller Cover

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Controller Cover.

<If the Fax is installed>

1x

4x

2x

<If the Fax is not installed>

3x

2x

124
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (Wi-Fi model only)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Wireless LAN PCB.

1x

1x

Removing the Wireless LAN Support Plate (Wi-Fi model only)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

4. “Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (Wi-Fi model only)” on page 125

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Wireless LAN Support Plate.

1x

125
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Main Controller PCB

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
Make sure to perform “Before Replacing the Main Controller PCB” on page 161before replacing the Main Controller PCB.

1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

■ Procedure
1. Disconnect all connectors from the Main Controller PCB and then remove the PCB.
<MF635Cx>
<MF634Cdw>

J924 J922 J918

J914 J927
4x
15x
J917
J907 J925 J923
J926
J906

J905 J904
J920, J921
J921 J911
J908 J920 J912 J909

J910 J916 J919

2. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the Main Controller PCB” on page 162

Removing the Main Controller Support Plate

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

4. “Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 126

5. “Removing the Wireless LAN Support Plate (Wi-Fi model only)” on page 125

126
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Main Controller Support Plate.

2x
3x

2x

Removing the Engine Controller PCB

■ Preparation

CAUTION:
Make sure to perform “Before Replacing the Engine Controller PCB” on page 161before replacing the Engine Controller
PCB.

1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

4. “Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 126

5. “Removing the Wireless LAN Support Plate (Wi-Fi model only)” on page 125

6. “Removing the Main Controller Support Plate” on page 126

127
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Engine Controller PCB.

3x 18x 5x

1x

1x

NOTE:
Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position.

2. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB” on page 161

Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

128
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.

3x 1x 4x

Removing the Main Motor

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Main Motor.

4x

1x

129
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Removing the Control Panel Unit

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Panel Arm Cover (Middle).

2x

2. Remove the Panel Arm Right Cover and Panel Arm Left Cover.

1x

3. Remove the Panel Rear Upper Cover.

1x
1x

130
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Remove the Panel Front Lower Cover.

5. Remove the Control Panel.

3x 1x

6. Remove the Panel Rear Lower Cover. Disconnect the connector and HDMI Cable, and free the harness from the Wire
Saddle.

2x 2x

1x

131
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Remove the Panel Rear Cover.

2x

8. Remove the Hinge Unit.

3x

9. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the Control Panel” on page 161

Removing the OFF Hook PCB (Fax model only)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

■ Procedure
1. Remove the OFF Hook PCB Unit.

2x

132
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Connectors and the Edge Saddles.

2x

2x

3. Remove the OFF Hook PCB.

2x

Removing the NCU PCB (Fax model only)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

■ Procedure
1. Remove the NCU PCB.

4x

1x

2x

Removing the NCU Support Plate

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

133
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the NCU PCB (Fax model only)” on page 133

■ Procedure
1. Remove the NCU Support Plate.

3x

1x

Removing the Speaker (Fax model only)

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

134
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Speaker.

CAUTION:
• Do not directly touch the speaker of the Fax Unit.
• Be sure not to damage the speaker.

1x

2x

2x

Removing the USB PCB

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Upper Left Front Cover” on page 97

6. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

7. “Removing the Upper Right Front Cover” on page 98

8. “Removing the Right Front Upper Cover” on page 98

9. “Removing the Upper Cover Unit ” on page 99

135
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the USB PCB Unit.

2x

1x

1x

2. Remove the USB Connector Cover.

Removing the Fan

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Duct.

2x

136
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Free the harness, and remove the Fan Unit.

4x

3x

3. Remove the Fan Unit.

3x 2x

4. Remove the fan from the unit.

1x

1x

Removing the Power Switch Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

137
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Power Switch Unit.

1x 1x

1x

138
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Image Formation System

Removing the Main Drive Assembly

■ How to handle the Main Drive Assembly

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Main Drive Assembly as it cannot be rebuilt after the disassembly.

Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Roller.

1. Open the Rear Cover Unit and the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit.

139
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Roller.

2x
2x

Removing the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Rear Cover Unit” on page 94

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Holder.

2x

140
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Shaft Retainer Holder.

1x

3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit.

Removing the ITB Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

3. “Removing the Rear Cover Unit” on page 94

4. “Removing the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit” on page 140

141
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
• Place the ITB Unit on a sheet of paper.
• Be sure not to damage or touch the ITB Unit.

1. Remove the Duct Cover.

2x

2. With the Cartridge Cover closed, rotate the lever approximately 45 degrees in the direction of the arrow while pulling
it toward the front, and then pull it further toward the front.

3. Slide the gear to the left to disengage the shaft from the ITB Unit.

142
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. With the Cartridge Cover opened, remove the screws, and pull out the ITB Unit while lifting the stoppers and holding
the handles on the left and right sides.

CAUTION:
When installing the ITB Unit, be sure to install it with the Toner Cartridge Cover opened and the shaft on the left side
disengaged from the ITB Unit After properly installing the ITB Unit, be sure to return the shaft on the left side and the levers
back to their original positions.

2x

5. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the ITB Unit” on page 161

Removing the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the Rear Cover Unit” on page 94

5. “Removing the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit” on page 140

6. “Removing the ITB Unit” on page 141

7. “Removing the Cartridge Cover ” on page 95

8. “Removing the Cartridge Tray” on page 96

143
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

1. Remove the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit.

1x

1x

1x

1x

2. Actions after replacement: “After Replacing the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit” on page 161

144
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Fixing System

Removing the Fixing Assembly

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Upper Left Front Cover” on page 97

6. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

7. “Removing the Upper Right Front Cover” on page 98

8. “Removing the Right Front Upper Cover” on page 98

9. “Removing the Upper Cover Unit ” on page 99

10. “Removing the Duplex Reverse Drive Unit” on page 152

11. “Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit” on page 128

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Since the Fixing Assembly is hot immediately after the power is turned OFF, give it time to cool down before
removing it.

1. Remove the Rear Upper Unit Plate.

5x

145
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Free the harness from the guide.

1x

3. Free the harness.

4x

1x

4. Remove the Fixing Assembly.

3x

Removing the Fixing Motor

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

146
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Fixing Motor.

1x

2x

147
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

Pickup Feed Delivery System

Removing the Delivery Sensor Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

4. “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 100

5. “Removing the Upper Left Front Cover” on page 97

6. “Removing the Control Panel Unit” on page 130

7. “Removing the Upper Right Front Cover” on page 98

8. “Removing the Right Front Upper Cover” on page 98

9. “Removing the Upper Cover Unit ” on page 99

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Rear Upper Unit plate.

5x

148
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Remove the Delivery Sensor Unit.

2x 1x

CAUTION:
When installing it, be sure to insert the flag inside the [A] part to install it.

[A]

Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Feed Roller Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Cassette Pickup Roller and the surface of the Feed Roller.

149
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

CAUTION:
When laying down the main body, be sure to secure the ADF Unit with tape to prevent from opening.

1. Pull out the cassette, and stand the host machine with its rear side down.

2. Remove the Cassette Pickup Roller.

1x

3. Remove the Cassette Feed Roller.

Removing the Cassette Separation Roller Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

150
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure

CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Separation Roller.

CAUTION:
When laying down the main body, be sure to secure the ADF Unit with tape to prevent from opening.

1. Pull out the cassette, and stand the host machine with its rear side down.

151
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Open the cover, and remove the Separation Roller.

CAUTION:
When installing it, be sure that the D-cut is fitted properly.

Removing the Duplex Reverse Drive Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Remove the cover.

1x

152
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

2. Free the harness from the guides, and disconnect the connectors.

2x

2x

3. Remove the Duplex Reverse Drive Unit.

3x

1x

Removing the Pickup Guide

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Left Cover” on page 90

3. “Removing the Rear Cover Unit” on page 94

4. “Removing the Controller Cover ” on page 124

5. “Removing the NCU Support Plate” on page 133

153
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

■ Procedure
1. Remove the Duplex Gear Assembly.

2x

2. Remove the Right Holder.

2x

3. Remove the guide.

2x

154
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Disconnect the connector, and free the harness from the harness guide.

1x

1x

5. Shift the host machine by approximately 100 mm from the working table.

100 mm 100 mm

6. Remove the connector and core.

1x

155
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Open the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit and remove the Pickup Guide.

CAUTION:
• Remove the Pickup Guide with the Cassette pulled out.
• When the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit is opened, the Secondary Transfer Feed Unit and Pickup Guide may fall so
make sure to remove the Pickup Guide while holding them with hands.

2x

Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit

■ Preparation
1. “Removing the Toner Cartridge” on page 89

2. “Removing the Right Cover” on page 91

■ Procedure
1. Close the Cartridge Cover.

2. Remove the cassette, and remove the Multi-purpose Tray Assembly.

3. Open the Cartridge Cover.

156
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4. Free the harness from the guide, and then disconnect the connector.

1x

1x

5. Close the Cartridge Cover and Rear Cover Unit, and stand the host machine with its rear side down.

CAUTION:
When laying down the main body, be sure to secure the ADF Unit with tape to prevent from opening.

6. Open the Cartridge Cover, and remove the screws of the plate of the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.

2x

157
 5. Parts Replacement and Cleaning

7. Free the harness from the guide.

1x

8. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.

1x
1x

CAUTION:
When installing it, be careful not to drop the gear and spring.

158
6 Adjustment
Location where the service label is
affixed ........................................... 160
Adjustment at Parts Replacement.... 161
 6. Adjustment

Location where the service label is affixed

NOTE:
The service label is affixed on the Main Controller Cover on the left side of the host machine.

160
 6. Adjustment

Adjustment at Parts Replacement

After Replacing the Control Panel

1. Execute the following service mode to adjust the coordinate position on the touch panel.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

2. Check that the service mode setting value is "1" in the following service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCH-R

CAUTION:
When the value is not "1" in the above service mode, re-adjust the coordinate position on the touch panel.

After Replacing the ITB Unit

1. Perform the following
• Adjustment / Maintenance > > Adjust Image Quality > Full Adjust

After Replacing the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit

1. Perform the following
• Adjustment / Maintenance > > Adjust Image Quality > Full Adjust

Engine Controller PCB

■ Before Replacing the Engine Controller PCB
The setting values stored in the Engine Controller PCB NVRAM are stored as a backup in the Main Controller PCB NVRAM.
Before replacing the Engine Controller PCB, be sure to perform the steps shown below to back up the setting values.
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
Turn OFF and then ON the power.

CAUTION:
Perform backup immediately before replacing the Engine Controller PCB.

■ After Replacing the Engine Controller PCB

The setting values stored in the Engine Controller PCB NVRAM are stored as a backup in the Main Controller PCB NVRAM.
After replacing the Engine Controller PCB, be sure to perform the steps shown below to restore the setting values.
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > RSTR-DCN
Turn OFF and then ON the power.

Main Controller PCB

■ Before Replacing the Main Controller PCB
The following setting values are recorded in the Main Controller PCB. When the Main Controller PCB is replaced, these setting
values are all returned to the default unless they are restored.
• User mode setting values
• Service mode setting values
These setting values can be restored by performing backup by any of the following methods:
Refer to the Backup List for the details of items that are backed up.
“Backup Data List” on page 339

161
 6. Adjustment

1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to [1].

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

NOTE:
The setting [SMD-EXPT] can be configured either from the Control Panel or remote UI.

2. These setting values can be restored by performing backup by any of the following methods:
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export
• RUI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export

CAUTION:
• Perform backup immediately before replacing the Main Controller PCB.
• When the Main Controller PCB is replaced, the user data, service data, and logs are initialized and the system manager
ID and password are changed back to the default values (ID: 7654321 / PWD: 7654321).

CAUTION:
Perform backup immediately before replacing the Main Controller.

■ After Replacing the Main Controller PCB

CAUTION:
The language displayed changes to English immediately after the replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Be sure to
perform the following steps 1 to 5 in order to reflect the language of the country and the country-specific settings that had
been configured before the replacement of the Main Controller PCB.

1. Turn ON the power of the host machine.

2. Enter service mode.

Setup Guide will start. Forcibly open the service mode screen.

3. Location information setting

[Setting value]
1: Japan, 2: North America, 3: Korea, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Europe, 7: Asia, 8: Oceania, 9: Brazil, 10: Latin America
• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > LOCALE

4. Paper size configuration setting

[Setting value]
1: AB configuration, 2: Inch configuration, 3: A configuration, 4: AB/Inch configuration
• COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SIZE-LC

5. Clear the setting information

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL

6. Clear the RCON backup

Execute the following service mode to clear the backup data of RCON.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > RCON

7. Enter the XYZ values

Enter the values shown on the service label in service mode.
<W-PLT-X>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
<W-PLT-Y>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
<W-PLT-Z>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

162
 6. Adjustment

8. Calculate the target value of B&W shading

Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and then execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT

9. Enter the value of the stream reading position

Enter the values shown on the service label in service mode.
<STRD-POS>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

10. AGC adjustment (paper front)

1. Enter a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (paper front).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write down the values on the service
label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC
5. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write down the values on the service
label.)

11. AGC adjustment (back side) (simultaneous duplex scanning models only)
1. Enter a provisional value.
B&W mode
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
Color mode
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK

163
 6. Adjustment

2. Execute the following service mode.

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the following service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2
3. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2
4. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write down the values on the service
label.)

12. Paper back shading initial measurement (simultaneous duplex scanning models only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1

164
 6. Adjustment

2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Member (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass, and execute the following
service mode.

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

3. Check the following service mode to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHDST
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Member (FL1-4365), and perform
the procedure from step 1 again.

13. Enter the offset values

Enter the values shown on the service label in service mode.
<DFTAR-R>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
<DFTAR-G>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
<DFTAR-B>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
<DFTAR-BW>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
<DFTBK-R>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
<DFTBK-G>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
<DFTBK-B>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
<DFTBK-BW>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
<ADJ-X>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X

165
 6. Adjustment

<ADJ-Y>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
<ADJ-X-MG>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG
<ADJ-Y-DF>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
<ADJY-DF2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
<DOCST>
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
<DOCST2>
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
<LA-SPEED>
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
<LA-SPD2>
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
<100-RG>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
<100-GB>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
<100DF-RG>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF-RG
<100DF-GB>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF-GB
<100DF2RG>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF2RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG
<100DF2GB>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF2GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2GB
<OFST-P-Y>
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-Y
<OFST-P-M>
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-M
<OFST-P-C>
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-C
<OFST-P-K>
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K

166
 6. Adjustment

14. Enter the MTF values

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF-M1, MTF-M4, and MTF-M7 are the same.
• The values of MTF-M2, MTF-M5, and MTF-M8 are the same.
• The values of MTF-M3, MTF-M6, and MTF-M9 are the same.

<MTF-M1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M7
<MTF-M2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M8
<MTF-M3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M9

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF2-M1, MTF2-M4, and MTF2-M7 are the same.
• The values of MTF2-M2, MTF2-M5, and MTF2-M8 are the same.
• The values of MTF2-M3, MTF2-M6, and MTF2-M9 are the same.

<MTF2-M1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M7
<MTF2-M2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M8
<MTF2-M3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M9

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF3-M1, MTF3-M4, and MTF3-M7 are the same.
• The values of MTF3-M2, MTF3-M5, and MTF3-M8 are the same.
• The values of MTF3-M3, MTF3-M6, and MTF3-M9 are the same.

<MTF3-M1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M7
<MTF3-M2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M8
<MTF3-M3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-M9

167
 6. Adjustment

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF-S1, MTF-S4, and MTF-S7 are the same.
• The values of MTF-S2, MTF-S5, and MTF-S8 are the same.
• The values of MTF-S3, MTF-S6, and MTF-S9 are the same.

<MTF-S1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S7
<MTF-S2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S8
<MTF-S3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S9

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF2-S1, MTF2-S4, and MTF2-S7 are the same.
• The values of MTF2-S2, MTF2-S5, and MTF2-S8 are the same.
• The values of MTF2-S3, MTF2-S6, and MTF2-S9 are the same.

<MTF2-S1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S7
<MTF2-S2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S8
<MTF2-S3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-S9

NOTE:
To reduce the number of label items, the setting values are the same.
• The values of MTF3-S1, MTF3-S4, and MTF3-S7 are the same.
• The values of MTF3-S2, MTF3-S5, and MTF3-S8 are the same.
• The values of MTF3-S3, MTF3-S6, and MTF3-S9 are the same.

<MTF3-S1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S7
<MTF3-S2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S8
<MTF3-S3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF3-S9

168
 6. Adjustment

15. Enter the linearity correction values

Enter the following values shown on the service label in service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-B

16. Execute initial adjustment

1. Execute the following service mode to back up the Engine Controller setting values.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
2. Configure the wireless LAN function settings. (In the case of the host machine having the wireless LAN function)
• COPIER > OPTION > ACC > WLAN
3. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine.
Setup Guide will start. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the settings.
4. In the following service mode, adjust the Touch Panel.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

17. Migrate the user data and service mode setting information
1. Enter service mode, and set the following item to [1].
• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

2. Restore the data in the same way as that of backup.

Refer to the Backup List for the details of items that are restored.
“Backup Data List” on page 339
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import
• RUI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import

CAUTION:
Be sure to restore the data after replacing the Main Controller PCB.

3. Enter service mode, and set the following item to [0].

• COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT

NOTE:
The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.

18. Reinstall the drivers

1. Uninstall the following drivers on the user's PC.
• Printer driver
• Fax driver
• Scanner driver
• MF Scan Utility
2. Refer to the following items in Getting Started and install the drivers which were uninstalled.
• In case of network connection: "To connect via wired LAN"
• In case of USB connection: "To connect via USB"

NOTE:
MAC address information is changed after replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Therefore, when the PC and the machine are
connected by the network, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine on the network. When the PC and the machine are
connected by USB, the PC will not be able to recognize the machine if the USB ID is changed. That is why the drivers need to be
reinstalled.

169
 6. Adjustment

After Replacing the ADF Unit

1. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
1. Entering a provisional value
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS, set the value to "-20".
2. Executing the service mode
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If OK or NG is displayed on the UI, whether the operation was successful or failed can be judged based on it. If OK or
NG is not displayed, check the following value.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
If the value above is -20 and remains unchanged, it is judged that the operation failed.
4. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and execute the following service mode
again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
5. If the operation is successful
Write the following value on the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

2. AGC adjustment (back side) (duplex scanning ADF model only)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all values remain unchanged at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC2 again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all values remain unchanged at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC2 again.

170
 6. Adjustment

3. Paper back shading initial measurement (duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1
2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass and execute the following
service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. Check COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > BK-SHDST to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) and execute the
initial measurement of the paper back shading again.

4. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW to 315.
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW to 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

171
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed.

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the 1-PASS ADF 1-sided model, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. ADF (front/back) geometric adjustment

1. On an image copied using the ADF, check the non-image width in the X and Y directions and the expansion/contraction
in the X direction. If adjustment is needed, enter the following adjustment values.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
2. If you enter adjustment values, write the final values on the service label.

After Replacing the Reader CIS Unit

1. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
1. Entering a provisional value
• In COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS , set the value to "-20".
2. Executing the service mode
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If OK or NG is displayed on the UI, whether the operation was successful or failed can be judged based on it. If OK or
NG is not displayed, check the following value.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
If the value above is -20 and remains unchanged, it is judged that the operation failed.
4. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and execute the following service mode
again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
5. If the operation is successful
Write the following value on the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

172
 6. Adjustment

2. AGC adjustment (paper front)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed.
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed"
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC again.

3. Paper back shading initial measurement (duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1

173
 6. Adjustment

2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass and execute the following
service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. Check COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > BK-SHDST to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) and execute the
initial measurement of the paper back shading again.

4. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment.

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW to 315.
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW to 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

174
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed.

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the single sided scanning ADF modell, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not
change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. Copyboard geometric adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the values of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, and ADJ-X-MG shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG
Write the entered values on the service label.

6. ADF (front/back) geometric adjustment

1. On an image copied using the ADF, check the non-image width in the X and Y directions and the expansion/contraction
in the X direction. If adjustment is needed, enter the following adjustment values.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
2. If you enter adjustment values, write the final values on the service label.

After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit

1. Check the setting value of the Standard White Plate.

175
 6. Adjustment

2. After entering the X, Y, and Z values shown on the barcode on the Copyboard Glass in the following service mode
items, and then write the entered values (the X, Y, and Z values shown on the barcode on the Copyboard Glass) on
the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

NOTE:
The value of W-PLT-X: The first four digits of the value on the label
The value of W-PLT-Y: The four digits in the middle of the value on the label
The value of W-PLT-Z: The last four digits of the value on the label

3. Calculate the target value of B&W shading

Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and then execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT

4. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position

1. Entering a provisional value
• In COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS, set the value to "-20".
2. Executing the service mode
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If OK or NG is displayed on the UI, whether the operation was successful or failed can be judged based on it. If OK or
NG is not displayed, check the following value.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
If the value above is -20 and remains unchanged, it is judged that the operation failed.
4. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and execute the following service mode
again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
5. If the operation is successful
Write the following value on the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

5. AGC adjustment (paper front)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)

176
 6. Adjustment

4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed"
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC again.

6. AGC adjustment (back side) (duplex scanning ADF model only)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC2 again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all values remain unchanged at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC2 again.

7. Paper back shading initial measurement (duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1

177
 6. Adjustment

2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass and execute the following
service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. Check COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > BK-SHDST to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) and execute the
initial measurement of the paper back shading again.

8. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW to 315.
In the case of theduplex scanning ADF model, also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW to 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

178
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the single sided scanning ADF model, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not
change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

9. Copyboard geometric adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the values of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, and ADJ-X-MG shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG
Write the entered values on the service label.

10. ADF (front/back) geometric adjustment

1. On an image copied using the ADF, check the non-image width in the X and Y directions and the expansion/contraction
in the X direction. If adjustment is needed, enter the following adjustment values.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
2. If you enter adjustment values, write the final values on the service label.

After Replacing the Reader Unit

1. Check the setting value of the Standard White Plate.

179
 6. Adjustment

2. After entering the X, Y, and Z values shown on the barcode on the Copyboard Glass in the following service mode
items, and then write the entered values (the X, Y, and Z values shown on the barcode on the Copyboard Glass) on
the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

NOTE:
The value of W-PLT-X: The first four digits of the value on the label
The value of W-PLT-Y: The four digits in the middle of the value on the label
The value of W-PLT-Z: The last four digits of the value on the label

3. Calculate the target value of B&W shading

Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and then execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT

4. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position

1. Entering a provisional value
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS, set the value to "-20".
2. Executing the service mode
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If OK or NG is displayed on the UI, whether the operation was successful or failed can be judged based on it. If OK or
NG is not displayed, check the following value.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
If the value above is -20 and remains unchanged, it is judged that the operation failed.
4. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and execute the following service mode
again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
5. If the operation is successful
Write the following value on the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

5. AGC adjustment (paper front)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)

180
 6. Adjustment

4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed"
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-BW-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LED-CL-B
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC again.

6. AGC adjustment (back side) (For the duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all values remain unchanged at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC2 again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all values remain unchanged at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC2 again.

7. Paper back shading initial measurement (duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1

181
 6. Adjustment

2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass and execute the following
service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. Check COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > BK-SHDST to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) and execute the
initial measurement of the paper back shading again.

8. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BWto 315.
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BWto 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

182
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the single sided scanning model, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not
change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

9. Copyboard geometric adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
100-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
Write the entered values on the service label.
To reduce the number of label items, the values of 100-xx and 50-xx are the same.

10. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW to 315.
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW to 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

183
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the 1-PASS ADF 1-sided model, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

11. Copyboard geometric adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the values of ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, and ADJ-X-MG shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG
Write the entered values on the service label.

12. ADF (front/back) geometric adjustment

1. On an image copied using the ADF, check the non-image width in the X and Y directions and the expansion/contraction
in the X direction. If adjustment is needed, enter the following adjustment values.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
2. If you enter adjustment values, write the final values on the service label.

13. Copyboard color displacement offset adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
100-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
Write the entered values on the service label.
To reduce the number of label items, the values of 100-xx and 50-xx are the same.

14. ADF (front/back) color displacement offset adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the value of 100DF-RG shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF-RG

184
 6. Adjustment

Enter the value of 100DF-GB shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF-GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF-GB
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model
Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the value of 100DF2RG shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF2RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG
Enter the value of 100DF2GB shown on the replacement label in the following service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 50DF2GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2GB

15. PASCAL adjustment

Enter the values shown on the label that comes with the part in the following service mode items.
Enter the values of OFST-P-Y, OFST-P-M, OFST-P-C, and OFST-P-K shown on the replacement label in the following
service modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-M
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-C
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K
Write the entered values on the service label.

16. Enter the MTF values

Enter the following values shown on the replacement label that comes with the part in the following service mode items
<MTF-M1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M7
<MTF-M2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M8
<MTF-M3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M9
<MTF-S1>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S1
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S4
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S7
<MTF-S2>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S2
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S5
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S8
<MTF-S3>
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S3
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S6
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-S9
Write the entered values on the service label.

17. Enter the linearity correction values

Enter the following values shown on the service label in service mode
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-GA-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LNR-OF-B

185
 6. Adjustment

After Replacing the ADF CIS Unit

1. Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
1. Entering a provisional value
• In COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS , set the value to "-20".
2. Executing the service mode
Execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If OK or NG is displayed on the UI, whether the operation was successful or failed can be judged based on it. If OK or
NG is not displayed, check the following value.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
If the value above is -20 and remains unchanged, it is judged that the operation failed.
4. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine, and execute the following service mode
again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
5. If the operation is successful
Write the following value on the service label.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS

2. AGC adjustment (back side) (duplex scanning ADF model only)

1. Entering a provisional value
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,000.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
Change the values of the following service mode settings to 1,100.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
2. Execute the following service modes to perform the AGC adjustment (surface).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-AGC2
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. If the operation was "successful", this procedure is completed. (There is no need to write the value on the service label.)
4. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed
Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
B&W mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,000", the operation result is judged to be "failed"
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-BWBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > BW-AGC again.
Color mode
Check the following values. If all of them remain at "1,100", the operation result is judged to be "failed".
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLRBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLGBK
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > LE-CLBBK
If the operation result is judged to be "failed", turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION >
CCD > CL-AGC again.

186
 6. Adjustment

3. Paper back shading initial measurement (duplex scanning ADF model only)
1. Execute the following service mode without placing anything on the Stream Reading Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD1
2. Place the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) on the Stream Reading Glass and execute the following
service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BK-SHD2

CAUTION:
Be sure to close the ADF before executing the foregoing service mode. Also be sure not to open the ADF while the service
mode is being executed.

3. Check COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > BK-SHDST to determine if it was [1] successful or [0] failed.
4. If it failed, clean the Stream Reading Glass and the Paper Back Shading Adjustment Jig (FL1-4365) and execute the
initial measurement of the paper back shading again.

4. DF white level (DF shading target) adjustment

1. Enter the values in the following service mode items respectively, and then adjust the white level
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW to 315.
In the case of the duplex scanning ADF model, also change the following settings.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R to 299.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G to 309.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B to 307.
• Set the value of COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW to 315.
2. Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
3. Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
4. If the operation was successful, write the setting value on the service label.

187
 6. Adjustment

5. How to judge whether the operation was successful or failed

Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if
the operation was successful or failed.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Check the foregoing values, and if all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged
to be "failed".
6. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items in sequence.
Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper (paper recommended by Canon) on the Copyboard Glass of the reader and
execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
Place the same blank paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2
7. In the case of the single sided scanning ADF model, check the following:
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
If all the values remain the same as those you entered, the operation result is judged to be "failed".
In the case of the single sided scanning ADF model, the operation result is judged to be OK even if this value does not
change.
8. In the case of a failure, turn OFF and then ON the power, and execute the following service mode items again.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

5. ADF (front/back) geometric adjustment

1. On an image copied using the ADF, check the non-image width in the X and Y directions and the expansion/contraction
in the X direction. If adjustment is needed, enter the following adjustment values.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2
2. If you enter adjustment values, write the final values on the service label.

188
7 Troubleshooting
Test Print...........................................190
Cartridge Log Report.........................202
Troubleshooting Items.......................205
Debug Log.........................................208
 7. Troubleshooting

Test Print

Engine Test Print

This machine has an engine test print function to check whether the printer engine is operating normally.

NOTE:
In the case of engine test print, a test print can be performed by using only the Engine Controller.

There are two types of engine test print: 1-sided print and 2-sided print*.
*: Duplex models only

1. Load A4/LTR paper in the Pickup Tray or Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.

2. While the machine is in the standby mode, open and close the Front Cover [1] for the predetermined number of
times in a row.

CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the next cycle of open/close within 1.5 seconds after the last cycle of open/close.

• In case of 1-sided print

4 times
• In case of 2-sided print
5 times or more

[1]

190
 7. Troubleshooting

3. An engine test print is executed, and the test pattern as shown below is printed on one side or both sides of a sheet
of paper.

Controller test print

The following test print types are available with this machine, and you can check for failure of an image with a circle 'Yes' described
in the image check items in the table below. When no failure is found in the test print in normal output mode, it can be caused in
PDL input or Reader.
The image of the test print is generated by the Main Controller PCB.

PG TYPE Pattern Image check items

TYPE Gra- Fog- Trans Black White Un- Un- Right Straig Color Color Ghost Den- White
dation ging fer line line even even Angle ht dis- sity spots
Fault (Color Den- Den- Lines place-
line) sity sity at ment
the
Front /
Rea
0-1 For R&D use
2 Color chart Yes
3 For R&D use
4 Rainbow chart Yes
(vertical scanning
direction, A4)
5 Rainbow chart Yes
(horizontal scan-
ning direction, A4)
6 Color grid (A4) Yes Yes Yes
7 Rainbow chart Yes
(vertical scanning
direction, LTR/
LGL)
8 Rainbow chart Yes
(horizontal scan-
ning direction,
LTR/LGL)
9 Color grid (LTR/ Yes Yes Yes
LGL)
10 16 gradations Yes Yes Yes Yes
11 17 gradations of Yes
Y/M/C/Bk/R/G/B
12 Halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

191
 7. Troubleshooting

PG TYPE Pattern Image check items

TYPE Gra- Fog- Trans Black White Un- Un- Right Straig Color Color Ghost Den- White
dation ging fer line line even even Angle ht dis- sity spots
Fault (Color Den- Den- Lines place-
line) sity sity at ment
the
Front /
Rea
13 For checking Yes
ghost due to
transfer failure
14 For checking the Yes Yes
density patch
15 For checking Yes Yes Yes
transfer
20 For R&D use
21 For checking de- Yes Yes
veloping perform-
ance (white spots)
22 For checking res- Yes Yes Yes
olution
23 For checking Yes Yes Yes
banding image
24 4 colors (land- Yes Yes Yes Yes
scape)
25 4 colors (portrait) Yes Yes Yes Yes
26 For calibrating
color difference
between the front
and back sides
with DADF (1-
path model)

Follow the procedure shown below to output the test print.

1. Select the following service mode.

TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE

2. Enter the type number of the test print using the numeric keypad, and press the [Apply] key.

NOTE:
If necessary, change the settings for test print in the following service mode.
If the settings are not changed, a test print will be executed with the initial values of service mode settings.
• Setting of the number of output sheets:
TESTMODE > PRINT > COUNT
• Setting of 1-sided/2-sided printing:
TESTMODE > PRINT > PHASE
• Setting of the image formation method:
TESTMODE > PRINT > MODE
• Setting of the image correction table:
TESTMODE > PRINT > THRU
• Setting of ON/OFF of the laser scanning interpolation process:
TESTMODE > PRINT > NRKE
• Setting of ON/OFF of the test print interpolation process:
TESTMODE > PRINT > BLND
• Setting of the paper source used when outputting a test print:
TESTMODE > PRINT > FEED

3. Execute the following service mode to output a test print.

TESTMODE > PRINT > START

192
 7. Troubleshooting

■ How to use the test print

● Color chart (TYPE=2)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Color Check the color. Cartridge error
Soiling on the Color Displacement/Density Sensor
ITB Unit error
Reader error

● Rainbow chart (vertical scanning direction) (TYPE=4, TYPE=7)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Color displacement Output the PG after performing color displacement correction, Soiling on the Color Displacement/Density Sensor
and check the displacement for each color in the feed direc- Cartridge error
tion. ITB Unit error
Main Drive Unit error

193
 7. Troubleshooting

● Rainbow chart (horizontal scanning direction) (TYPE=5, TYPE=8)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Color displacement Output the PG after performing color displacement correction, Soiling on the Color Displacement/Density Sensor
and check the displacement for each color in the shaft direc- Cartridge error
tion. ITB Unit error
Laser Scanner Unit error
Main Controller PCB error

● Color grid (TYPE=6, TYPE=9)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Color displacement Check that there is no displacement between the lines of the Laser Scanner Unit error
respective colors. ITB Unit error
Soiling on the Registration Sensor
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Main Drive Unit (drum rotation) error
Right angle accura- Check that there is nothing wrong with the right angle accuracy Laser Scanner Unit error
cy and linearity and linearity between the lines of the respective colors. Registration Roller error
Secondary Transfer Roller error

194
 7. Troubleshooting

● 16 gradations (TYPE=10)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Gradation Check that the 16 density gradations are recognizable. Photosensitive Drum error
Laser Scanner Unit error
Fogging Check whether fogging appears only in the blank area. Photosensitive Drum error
Laser Scanner Unit error
White line Check the entire image for any white line. Photosensitive Drum error
Laser Scanner Unit error
Uneven density be- Check for any uneven density between the rear and front Photosensitive Drum error
tween the front and sides. Laser Scanner Unit error
rear Soiling on the laser light path

● 17 gradations of Y/M/C/Bk/R/G/B (TYPE=11)

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

$K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K $K

%K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K %K

&K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K &K

'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K 'K

(K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K (K

)K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K )K

))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K ))K

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Gradation Check that the 16 density gradations are recognizable. Photosensitive Drum error
Laser Scanner Unit error

195
 7. Troubleshooting

● Halftone (TYPE=12)

NOTE:
Various settings can be configured in the following service mode.
• Output of each developing color:
TESTMODE > PRINT > SW-Y
TESTMODE > PRINT > SW-M
TESTMODE > PRINT > SW-C
TESTMODE > PRINT > SW-K
• Print density setting:
TESTMODE > PRINT > DENS-Y
TESTMODE > PRINT > DENS-M
TESTMODE > PRINT > DENS-C
TESTMODE > PRINT > DENS-K

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Transfer failure Check the entire image for any transfer failure. ITB error (scratches or soiling)
Primary Transfer Pad error (scratches or soiling)
Secondary Transfer Roller error (scratches or soil-
ing)
Black line (colored Check the entire image for any black line. Scratches on the Photosensitive Drum
line)
White line Check the entire image for any white line. ITB Unit error
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Soiling on the laser light path
Uneven density at Check the entire image for any uneven density at regular in- Photosensitive Drum error
regular intervals tervals.
Uneven density Check the entire image for any uneven density. Soiling on the Dustproof Glas
Deterioration of the ITB

196
 7. Troubleshooting

● For checking ghost due to transfer failure (TYPE=13)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Ghost Check the degree of ghosting (area where the density is too Cartridge error
high or low) in halftone areas. ITB Unit error

● For checking the density patch (TYPE=14)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Density Check the density of each patch after calibration. Cartridge error
ITB Unit error
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Soiling on the Color Displacement/Density Sensor
Reader error
Uneven density Check the difference in density among patches. Cartridge error
ITB Unit error

197
 7. Troubleshooting

● For checking transfer (TYPE=15)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Uneven density Check that there is no uneven density in the solid area of each Laser Scanner Unit error
color. Cartridge error
Primary Transfer Pad error
Black line (colored Check that there is no black line (colored line) in the solid area Scratches on the Photosensitive Drum
line) of each color. Soiling on the Primary Charging Roller
White line Check that there is no white line in the solid area of each color. ITB Unit error
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Soiling on the laser light path

● For checking developing performance (white spots) (TYPE=21)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Gradation Check the gradation performance. Cartridge error
Soiling on the Color Displacement/Density Sensor
ITB Unit error
Reader error

198
 7. Troubleshooting

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

White spots White spots near the solid patches in halftone patches just Cartridge error
before and after the solid patches

● For checking resolution (TYPE=22)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Line Check the position and interval. Laser Scanner Unit error
Main Controller PCB error

● For checking banding image (TYPE=23)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Line Check the position and interval. Cartridge error
Main Drive Unit error
ITB Unit error
Fixing Assembly error
Error in the feed path
Paper slip at paper pickup

199
 7. Troubleshooting

● 4 colors (landscape) (TYPE=24)

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Line Check the position of the line, and check whether the line oc- If it occurs during copying but not with this
curs in all colors. PG:
Reader error

If it occurs only in a single color:

Cartridge error
Laser Scanner Unit error
ITB Unit error

If it occurs in all colors:

ITB Unit error
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Fixing Assembly error

● 4 colors (portrait) (TYPE=25)

200
 7. Troubleshooting

Check item Checking method Assumed cause

Line Check the position of the line, and check whether the line oc- If it occurs during copying but not with this
curs in all colors. PG:
Reader error

If it occurs only in a single color:

Cartridge error
Laser Scanner Unit error
ITB Unit error

If it occurs in all colors:

ITB Unit error
Secondary Transfer Roller error
Fixing Assembly error

201
 7. Troubleshooting

Cartridge Log Report

Logs such as history of cartridge replacement are output as a report.
There are two types of cartridge log reports; one for users and one for service technicians.

CAUTION:
Do not provide users with the cartridge log report for service technicians because it contains detailed information that is
not disclosed to end users.

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

Cartridge Log Report (For service technicians)

No. Description
[1] Replacement logs
[2] Cartridge type
[3] The number of times a non-genuine cartridge has been detected
[4] Non-genuine cartridge page count

202
 7. Troubleshooting

NOTE:
In addition to output as a report, cartridge logs can also be displayed on the remote UI service mode screen (for service technicians)
or remote UI screen (for users).
• To display cartridge logs (for service technicians):
SERVICE REPORT > CRG-LOG
• To display cartridge logs (for users)*:
Status Monitor/Cancel > Cartridge Log
* : When not displaying the cartridge log to users, set the following service mode to "0" (OFF).
• ON/OFF of [Cartridge Log] display:
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > CRG-LOG

Output method
Execute the following service mode to output a cartridge log report for service technicians.
• To output a report on cartridge replacement history:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > CRG-LOG

NOTE:
• To output a cartridge log report (for users)*:
Menu > Output Reports > Print List > Cartridge Log Report
* : When not allowing users to output the cartridge log report, set the following service mode to "0" (OFF).
• ON/OFF of [Cartridge Log Report] display:
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > CRG-LOG

Replacement logs
The record of replacement and usage of cartridges will be printed.

CAUTION:
Just after the cartridge has been replaced with a genuine cartridge or when a non-genuine cartridge is used, accurate
information cannot be obtained and a random or approximate value may be printed.

Item Description Remarks

(1) Serial No. Serial number of the cartridge
(2) Type Cartridge type • C1 : Genuine
• C2 to C8 : Non-genuine
• C0 : Unknown
(3) Cpcty. Cartridge capacity Displayed in accordance with the toner fillup
amount
(4/6) First/Last Used The date and time it was installed/last used
(S1/S5) Pg. Count * Cartridge page count (when it was installed/last used) 00000000 to 99999999
(5/7) Left The amount remaining in the cartridge (when it was instal- 0 to 100%
led/last used) New: 100%, Non-genuine: -)
(S2/S6) Toner * The remaining life of the toner (when it was installed/last -128 to 100%
used) (New: 100%, Indefinite: -%)
(S3/S7) Drum * The remaining life of the drum (when it was installed/last -128 to 100%
used) (New: 100%, Indefinite: -%)
(S4/S8) Parts * The remaining life of the Developing Assembly (when it was -128 to 100%
installed/last used) (New: 100%, Indefinite: -%)

* : S1 to S8 are printed only on reports for service technicians.

Number of detections of non-genuine cartridge / Page count of non-genuine cartridge

When a non-genuine cartridge is installed, it is classified as a cartridge type C2 to C9 according to the reason for judging it
nongenuine, and the number of detections of each type and the number of pages printed with the cartridge installed are recorded.

Reason for judg- Cartridge type Description

ing it non-genuine Report for Report for
users* service
OEM C3 C5 The number of detections of an OEM cartridge, and the number of pages printed

203
 7. Troubleshooting

Reason for judg- Cartridge type Description

ing it non-genuine Report for Report for
users* service
Communication error C2 C4 The number of detections of a cartridge without memory and the number of pages
printed
Refill C3 C6 The number of detections of a cartridge prepared by refilling toner into a genuine
cartridge, and the number of pages printed
Copied memory C3 C7 The number of detections of a cartridge prepared by refilling toner into a genuine
cartridge and copying the contents of a normal memory, and the number of pages
printed
Authentication failed C2 C8 The number of detections of a cartridge that cannot be authenticated, and the
number of pages printed
Incompatible C9 C9 The number of detections of a incompatible cartridge that can be installed physi-
cally, and the number of pages printed.

* : Only C2, C3 and C9 are displayed. The total count of the values of the reasons for judging the cartridge non-genuine is
displayed.

NOTE:
The number of detections of non-genuine cartridge and the page count of non-genuine cartridge can be reset.
• To clear the cartridge replacement log:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CRGL-CNT

204
 7. Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Items

Remedy for Image Failure

When an image failure occurs, perform the remedy by referring to the User's Guide.
• User's Guide > Top page > Troubleshooting > When You Cannot Print Properly

NOTE:
URL of User's Guide:
http://canon.com/oip-manual

Recurring faulty image

Overview
Foreign matters or lines on rollers along the paper feed path may cause faulty images in the vertical scanning direction.

Field Remedy
See the roller pitches listed in the tables below to clean and/or replace the corresponding parts.

CAUTION:
Since the Primary Charging Roller, Photosensitive Drum, and Developing Roller are located inside the cartridge and cannot
be cleaned, replace the cartridge.

Roller pitch Parts

Approx. 44 mm Registration Roller
Approx. 51 mm Secondary Transfer Roller
Approx. 19 mm Primary Charging Roller
Approx. 63 mm Photosensitive Drum
Approx. 31 mm Developing Roller
Approx. 57 mm Fixing Roller
Approx. 57 mm Pressure Firm

Confirming nip width

Overview
Although the nip width of the Fixing Assembly cannot be adjusted with this machine, it can be checked.
By checking the nip width when fixing failure occurs, it is possible to judge whether there is a problem with the Fixing Assembly.

Field Remedy
Check the nip width of the Fixing Assembly by the following procedure.

1. Print a solid black image on an A4/LTR size paper using the cartridge of this machine and bring it to the customer
site.

2. Load the solid black printed paper with its printing side facing down in a cassette of the machine.

3. Use an external device to print a solid white image.

4. Open the Front Cover after approx. 25 seconds, leave it for 10 seconds or more, and then take out the printed paper.

205
 7. Troubleshooting

5. Measure the widths of the glossy part of the toner on the printed paper, and check that they are within the range as
follows.
• Center (a): 6.0 to 8.1 mm
• Edge (b) and (c): 6.3 to 8.5 mm each
• Difference between left and right ( | b - c | ): 1.0 mm or less

Center of sheet

Action When Hue Differs between the Front and Back Sides of the
Output Image at Duplex Copy (For the duplex scanning ADF model)
Overview
If hue differs between the front and back sides of the output image when making a copy of 2-sided original, perform color difference
correction on both front and back sides.

Field Remedy
Follow the procedure shown below to perform color difference correction.

1. Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment. (Adjustment of density of the printed output)
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust

2. Output PG-TYPE 26 from test mode in service mode.

• TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE

206
 7. Troubleshooting

3. Read the chart using the duplex scanning model (front side).
Place the chart PG-TYPE 26 output in test mode on the ADF with the printed side facing up and execute the following service
mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > 1PSCLB-A

4. Read the chart using the duplex scanning model (back side).
Place the chart PG-TYPE 26 output in test mode on the ADF with the printed side facing down and execute the following
service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > 1PSCLB-B

5. Judgment
Check that the following service mode values are 1 (reading succeeded).
• COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > 1P-ERR-A
• COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD > 1P-ERR-B
If any value other than 1 (reading succeeded) is displayed, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine and read
the chart again.

207
 7. Troubleshooting

Debug Log

Function Overview
The debug log is a log that analyzes the program behavior of the machine to enable developers to identify problems.
This machine is embedded with a function that compiles the log of the behavior of each software module as debug log and outputs
it as integrated log for analyzing problems.
Be sure to collect the debug log when the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs.
Note that there is no need for service technicians to check the content of collected debug log.

Cases in which collection of debug log is effective

Collection of debug log is effective in the following cases:
• Neither the Support Dept. of sales company nor CINC can reproduce the trouble that occurred at the customer site
• When the error frequency is low
• When the failure is suspected to be due to firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure.

CAUTION:
If the procedure for reproducing the failure is clear and the Support Dept. of sales company and CINC can reproduce it,
collection of debug log is not necessary.

Conditions for collecting logs

Conditions for not being able to collect logs
In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot be obtained.
• Service mode screen cannot be accessed
• The machine cannot recognize a USB flash drive
• No USB port is installed in the machine (when the model has only a copy function)

What is necessary to collect logs

A USB flash drive that satisfies the following conditions is required to obtain the debug logs of the machine:
• Formatted in FAT 16/FAT32
• There is a free space of approx. 100MB.
• Can be recognized by the machine

Collection procedure
The following shows the procedure for collecting the debug log from the Control Panel.

1. Connect a USB flash drive to the machine. In the case of a model having a USB connector on a side of the Control
Panel, be sure to connect the USB flash drive to the Control Panel. In the case of a model having a USB connector
only on the rear side, connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector on the rear side.

CAUTION:
In the case of a model having a USB connector on the Control Panel, if the USB flash drive is connected to the USB
connector on the rear side, debug logs are not transferred to the USB flash drive.

2. Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > LOGWRITE
"Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen
again.

3. Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > LOG2USB
"Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen
again.

208
 7. Troubleshooting

4. Remove the USB flash drive by the correct procedure.

Connect the USB flash drive to the PC, and check that the log file shown below has been saved.
• Output by LOGWRITE: SUBLOG.TXT
• Output by LOG2USB: SUBLOG_yyyymmdd.HHMMSS_xxx.gz (the file may be divided into multiple files)

209
8 Error/Jam/Alarm
Overview........................................... 211
Error Code.........................................214
Jam Code..........................................221
Alarm Code....................................... 226
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Overview
This section describes the error codes that are displayed when failure has occurred.

Code type Description Reference

Error Code This code is displayed when a failure caused by the host machine has occurred. List of Error Codes
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam has occurred. List of Jam Codes
Alarm Code This code is displayed when the machine's function has been partially lost. List of Alarm Codes

Error/Jam/Alarm Log indication

Error log
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ERR

䕧 is space 䕧 is space

090831䕧1624䕧E100-0200

Year/Month/Day Time/Minute Error Code

Indication example

ERR
090831 1624 E100-0200
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----

Jam log
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > JAM

/RFDWLRQFRGH 3DSHUIHHGSRVLWLRQ

090831䕧1624䕧3-1234-1-02
<HDU0RQWK'D\ 7LPH0LQXWH -DP&RGH 3DSHU6L]H&RGH

Indication example

JAM
JAM
090831 1624 3-1234-1-02
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----

211
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Alarm log
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2, ALARM-3

)RU5 'XVH $ODUPGHWDLOVFRUG

090831䕧1624䕧3-1234567-123456
<HDU0RQWK'D\ 7LPH0LQXWH $ODUP&RGH

Indication example

ALARM-2
090831 1624 3-1234567-123456
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----
------ ----

JAM/ERR LOG REPORT

Output procedure of the JAM/ERR LOG REPORT
Service Mode > COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P > ERR-LOG
The explanation of mention contents

>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@

>@ >@ >@ >@

>@ >@ >@ >@

No. Item
1 Day/Month Time/Minute
2 Location code
3 Not Used (for R&D)
4 Jam code
5 Total counter
6 Paper feed position
7 Paper size
8 Location code
9 Error code
10 Error details code
11 Total counter
12 Alarm level
13 Alarm code

212
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

No. Item
14 Alarm details code
15 Total counter

Location Code
The jam codes of this machine contain information on the location.
The location information is displayed in a single digit and has the meaning shown below:

Device Location code

Host machine 0
ADF 1

Pickup Position Code

When a jam occurs, the pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.

Pickup position Pickup position code

ADF 0
Pickup from Multi-purpose Tray 0
Cassette 1 1
Option cassette 2
At duplex printing 7

213
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Error Code

Error Code Details

E000-0000--- Error in temperature rising of Fixing Assembly
Detection Description Temperature of the Fixing Assembly did not reach a certain temperature within the specified period
of time.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E001-0000--- Abnormal high temperature of Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly was abnormally high.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E001-0001--- Abnormal high temperature of Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Sub Thermistor) was abnormally high.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E003-0000--- Abnormal low temperature of Fixing Assembly

Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly was abnormally low.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E003-0001--- It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Sub Thermistor) was
abnormally low.
Detection Description It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly (Sub Thermistor) was abnormally low.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E004-0000--- Error in fixing power supply drive circuit

Detection Description The zero cross signal was not detected for the specified period of time
or more.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E012-0000--- Black Main Motor error

Detection Description An error in the initial operation of the Main Motor was detected.
Remedy 1. Reconnect the connector of the Main Motor.
2. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E012-0001--- Black Main Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Main Motor was detected.
Remedy 1. Reconnect the connector of the Main Motor.
2. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E014-0000--- Error in startup of the Fixing Motor

Detection Description Revolution of the Fixing Motor did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

214
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E014-0001--- Fixing Motor rotation error

Detection Description Revolution of the Fixing Motor was out of the specified range.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Fixing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E015-0000--- Error in Main Motor

Detection Description The engine detected an error in the Main Motor.
Remedy 1. Check the harnesses/connectors connecting the Developing HP Switch and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Check the harnesses/connectors connecting the Developing Separation Solenoid and the
Engine Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Main Motor.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
5. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine Controller PCB, the Developing HP Switch,
Developing Separation Solenoid or Main Drive Assembly can be causing the problem. Remedy:
Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

E015-0001--- Cassette 1 lift-up error

Detection Description A rotation detection signal was not detected within the specified period of time after the Pickup
Motor of the cassette of the host machine was driven.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Engine Controller PCB and the Pickup Motor of the
cassette of the host machine.
2. Check the condition of the gear at the host machine side (missing teeth, swing).
3. Replace the Pickup Motor of the cassette of the host machine.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E015-0002--- Cassette 2 lift-up error

Detection Description After lift-up of the Lifting Plate of the 1-Cassette Unit started, ON status of the Lifter Sensor of the
1-Cassette Unit was not detected within the specified period of time.
Remedy 1. While the cassette of the 1-Cassette Unit is removed, turn ON the power and insert the cassette,
then check the operation sound of the motor.
When there is operation sound of the motor, check if the Lifting Plate has been lifted up.
When the Lifting Plate has been lifted up:
1-1. Check that the Lifter Sensor of the Cassette Unit is properly installed.
1-2. Check the harness/connector between the Engine Controller PCB and the Lifter Sensor.
1-3. Replace the Lifter Sensor.
1-4. Replace the Cassette Driver PCB.
1-5. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
When the Lifting Plate has not been lifted up:
2-1. Check the condition of the gear of the Cassette Unit (missing teeth, swing).
2-2. Check the harness/connector between the Engine Controller PCB and the Lifter Solenoid of
the Cassette Unit.
2-3. Replace the Lifter Solenoid.
2-4. Replace the Pickup Motor of the Cassette Unit.
2-5. Replace the Cassette Driver PCB.
2-6. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
When there is no operation sound of the motor, check the followings:
3-1. Check the harness/connector between the Engine Controller PCB and the Pickup Motor of
the Cassette Unit.
3-2. Check the condition of the gear at the Cassette Unit side (missing teeth, swing).
3-3. Replace the Pickup Motor.
3-4. Replace the Cassette Driver PCB.
3-5. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

215
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E020-0000--- Density Sensor / Color Displacement Sensor error

Detection Description An error in the Density Sensor / Color Displacement Sensor was detected.
Remedy 1. Check the remaining toner level.
2. Replace the Toner Cartridge.
3. Check the harness/connector between the Density Sensor and the Engine Controller PCB.
4. Check the harness/connector between the Color Displacement Sensor and the Engine
Controller PCB.
5. Replace the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit (included the Density Sensor / Color
Displacement Sensor).
6. Replace the ITB Unit.
7. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-1000--- Yellow Developing Motor rotation error

Detection Description It was judged that the Developing Motor did not rotate.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-1001--- Magenta Developing Motor rotation error

Detection Description It was judged that the Developing Motor did not rotate.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-1002--- Cyan Developing Motor rotation error

Detection Description It was judged that the Developing Motor did not rotate.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-1003--- Black Developing Motor rotation error

Detection Description It was judged that the Developing Motor did not rotate.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-2000--- Error in startup of the Yellow Developing Motor

Detection Description Revolution of the Developing Motor did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-2001--- Error in startup of the Magenta Developing Motor

Detection Description Revolution of the Developing Motor did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E021-2002--- Error in startup of the Cyan Developing Motor

Detection Description Revolution of the Developing Motor did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

216
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E021-2003--- Error in startup of the Black Developing Motor

Detection Description Revolution of the Developing Motor did not reach the specified value.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Developing Motor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Developing Motor.
3. Replace the Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E052-0000--- Duplex Feed Assembly absent error

Detection Description Connection of the Duplex Feed Assembly was not correct.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connector between the Duplex Reverse Solenoid and the Engine Controller
PCB.
2. Replace the Duplex Reverse Drive Unit (included the Duplex Reverse Solenoid).
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E066-0000--- Environment Sensor error

Detection Description An error in the Environment Sensor was detected.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/connection of the Environment Sensor and the Engine Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Pickup Guide (included the Environment Sensor).
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E078-0000--- Primary transfer disengagement mechanism error

Detection Description Primary transfer disengagement mechanism did not work properly.
Remedy 1. Check the harnesses/connectors between the Primary Transfer Disengagement Switch and the
Engine Controller PCB.
2. Check the harnesses/connectors between the Primary Transfer Disengagement Solenoid and
the Engine Controller PCB.
3. Replace the ITB Unit (included the Primary Transfer Disengagement Switch / Primary Transfer
Disengagement Solenoid).
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E100-0000--- Yellow scanner area failure

Detection Description Error in the Scanner Motor, Laser Scanner Unit, or BD detection in the yellow scanner area
Remedy 1. Check the harness/Flat Cable/connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
4. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine controller PCB, the Laser Scanner Unit can
be causing the problem. Remedy: Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

E100-0001--- Magenta scanner area failure

Detection Description Error in the Scanner Motor, Laser Scanner Unit, or BD detection in the magenta scanner area
Remedy 1. Check the harness/Flat Cable/connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
4. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine controller PCB, the Laser Scanner Unit can
be causing the problem. Remedy: Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

E100-0002--- Cyan scanner area failure

Detection Description Error in the Scanner Motor, Laser Scanner Unit, or BD detection in the cyan scanner area
Remedy 1. Check the harness/Flat Cable/connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
4. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine controller PCB, the Laser Scanner Unit can
be causing the problem. Remedy: Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

217
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E100-0003--- Black scanner area failure

Detection Description Error in the Scanner Motor, Laser Scanner Unit, or BD detection in the black scanner area
Remedy 1. Check the harness/Flat Cable/connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
4. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine controller PCB, the Laser Scanner Unit can
be causing the problem. Remedy: Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

E110-0000--- BD detection error

Detection Description The period of the BD signal deviated from the specified period by 3 seconds or more.
Remedy 1. Check the harness/Flat Cable/connector between the Laser Scanner Unit and the Engine
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
4. If the symptom persists after replacing the Engine controller PCB, the Laser Scanner Unit can
be causing the problem. Remedy: Contact the service office of corresponding sales company.

E194-0000--- CPR Sensor error

Detection Description An error in the CPR Sensor was detected.
Remedy 1. Replace the Toner Cartridge.
2. Check the harness/connector between the Color Displacement Sensor / Density Sensor and
the Engine Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Color Displacement Density Sensor Unit.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
5. Replace the ITB Unit.

E196-0000--- Engine Controller error

Detection Description Update of the Engine Controller was failed. (RFU mode right after the startup)
Remedy 1. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E198-0000--- Engine Controller memory failure

Detection Description Error in the nonvolatile memory on the Engine Controller PCB
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power and check if the symptom occurs again.
2. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E202-0001--- CIS Unit HP error (outward)

Detection Description The CIS Unit did not move to HP even it moved backward.
CIS HP Sensor error,
Reader Motor error,
CIS Unit error
Remedy 1. Replace the CIS HP Sensor.
2. Replace the Reader Motor.
3. Replace the CIS Unit.
4. Replace the Reader Unit.

E202-0002--- CIS Unit HP error (homeward)

Detection Description The CIS Unit did not move to HP even it moved forward.
CIS HP Sensor error,
Reader Motor error,
CIS Unit error
Remedy 1. Replace the CIS HP Sensor.
2. Replace the Reader Motor.
3. Replace the CIS Unit.
4. Replace the Reader Unit.

E246-0000--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

218
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E247-0000--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E302-0001--- Shading error

Detection Description When the light intensity is below the reference level at shading
Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the Flat Cable.
2. Replace the Flat Cable.
3. Replace the CIS Unit.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E302-0002--- Shading error

Detection Description Image sampling for shading was not completed.
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Check the connection of the harness.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
4. Replace the Reader Unit.

E350-0000--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E354-0000--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E355-0000--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E355-0004--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E355-0005--- System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact the sales company.

E732-0000--- Scanner communication error

Detection Description Scanner communication error
Remedy 1. Install the set of the controller firmware.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E733-0000--- Printer communication error

Detection Description Communication error between the Engine Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB occurred.
Remedy 1. Check the connector connection between the Engine Controller PCB and the Main Controller
PCB.
2. Install the set of the controller firmware.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
4. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E743-0000--- DDI communication error

Detection Description Software sequence error
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

219
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

E744-4000--- An invalid engine connection.

Detection Description An invalid engine connection was detected.
Remedy 1. Check if the proper Engine Controller PCB is installed.
2. Update the firmware.
3. Replace the Engine Controller PCB.

E744-5000--- Communication error between the Control Panel PCB and the Main Controller PCB
Detection Description Cannot communicate with Control Panel PCB.
Remedy 1. Check the connectors of the Control Panel PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Control Panel.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E744-6000--- Communication error with Wireless LAN PCB

Detection Description Description Communication with the Wireless LAN PCB could not be established.
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Check the connection of the Wireless LAN PCB.
3. Install the set of the controller firmware.
4. Replace the Wireless LAN PCB.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

E805-0005--- Cartridge Fan error

Detection Description The Cartridge Fan was locked for a specified consecutive period of time.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Cartridge Fan.
2. Replace the Cartridge Fan.

E806-0000--- Main Fan error

Detection Description The Main Fan was locked for a specified consecutive period of time.
Remedy 1. Check the connection of the Main Fan.
2. Replace the Main Fan.

E808-0000--- Low-voltage power supply failure detection

Detection Description Printer detected low-voltage power supply failure.
Remedy 1. Replace the Engine Controller PCB

E840-0000--- Pressure release mechanism error

Detection Description An error in pressure release mechanism of the Fixing Assembly was detected.
Remedy 1. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor.

220
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam Code

Jam Code Details

■ Host machine
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path

SR608

SR607

SR616

SR604
SR603

SR601
SR602

Location Jam code Jam Type Name of Jam Detec- Sensor No. Residual Paper Area
Code tion Sensor
0 0104 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR604 Pickup Assembly
0 0144 Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 0184 Duplex Assembly
0 01C4 Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 0105 Pickup Delay Jam 2 Multi-purpose Tray SR603 Pickup Assembly
0 0145 Pickup Sensor Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 0185 Duplex Assembly
0 01C5 Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 0208 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR604 Pickup Assembly
0 0248 Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 0288 Duplex Assembly
0 02C8 Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 010C Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 Registration Sensor/ SR604 / SR607 Pickup Assembly
0 014C Fixing Delivery Sen- Registration to Deliv-
sor ery Area
0 018C Duplex Assembly
0 01CC Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 0210 Fixing Delivery Stationary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sen- SR607 Pickup Assembly
0 0250 sor Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 0290 Duplex Assembly

221
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

0 02D0 Fixing Delivery Stationary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sen- SR607 Registration to Du-
sor plex Area
0 1014 Internal Residual Jam 1 Paper Width Sensor SR601 / SR602 / Pickup Assembly
0 1054 (Right)/Paper Width SR604 / SR607 / Registration to Deliv-
Sensor (Left)/Regis- SR608 / SR616 ery Area
tration Sensor/Fixing
0 1094 Duplex Assembly
Delivery Sensor/
0 10D4 Delivery Sensor/ Registration to Du-
Loop Sensor plex Area

0 1015 Internal Residual Jam 2 Paper Width Sensor SR601 / SR602 / Pickup Assembly
0 1055 (Right)/Paper Width SR603 / SR604 / Registration to Deliv-
Sensor (Left)/Multi- SR607 / SR608 / ery Area
purpose Tray Pickup SR616
0 1095 Duplex Assembly
Sensor/Registration
0 10D5 Sensor/Fixing Deliv- Registration to Du-
ery Sensor/Delivery plex Area
Sensor/Loop Sensor
0 1016 Internal Residual Jam 3 Paper Width Sensor SR601 / SR602 / Pickup Assembly
0 1056 (Right)/Paper Width SR603 / SR604 / Registration to Deliv-
Sensor (Left)/Multi- SR607 / SR608 / ery Area
purpose Tray Pickup SR616
0 1096 Duplex Assembly
Sensor/Registration
0 10D6 Sensor/Fixing Deliv- Registration to Du-
ery Sensor/Delivery plex Area
Sensor/Loop Sensor
0 1017 Internal Residual Jam 4 Paper Width Sensor SR601 / SR602 / Pickup Assembly
0 1057 (Right)/Paper Width SR603 / SR604 / Registration to Deliv-
Sensor (Left)/Multi- SR607 / SR608 / ery Area
purpose Tray Pickup SR616
0 1097 Duplex Assembly
Sensor/Registration
0 10D7 Sensor/Fixing Deliv- Registration to Du-
ery Sensor/Delivery plex Area
Sensor/Loop Sensor
0 1118 Door Open Jam - - Pickup Assembly
0 1158 Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 1198 Duplex Assembly
0 11D8 Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 021C Paper Wrapping Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sen- SR607 Pickup Assembly
0 025C sor Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 029C Duplex Assembly
0 02DC Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 0224 Duplex Re-pickup Assembly Jam 1 Registration Sensor SR604 Pickup Assembly
0 0264 Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 02A4 Duplex Assembly
0 02E4 Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 012C Delivery Delay Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sen- SR607 / SR608 Pickup Assembly
0 016C sor/Delivery Sensor Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 01AC Duplex Assembly
0 01EC Registration to Du-
plex Area
0 0230 Delivery Stationary Jam 1 Delivery Sensor SR608 Pickup Assembly
0 0270 Registration to Deliv-
ery Area
0 02B0 Duplex Assembly

222
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

0 02F0 Delivery Stationary Jam 1 Delivery Sensor SR608 Registration to Du-

plex Area
0 0001 to Misprint - - -
0077

Misprint Jam Code

Unlike paper feed jams detected by sensors, Misprint Jam Code is a jam code displayed when the printer is determined to be
unable to print normally due to details shown in the table below.
When a misprint is detected, paper being picked up and fed is automatically delivered. However, if a jam occurs due to the sensor
detection during automatic delivery, the corresponding jam code is displayed.

Location Jam code Type Details

Code
0 0001 Print Reservation Re- During a jam, the Main Controller received the resend request for the print image.
send Request (Occurs during a jam)
0 0002 Sequence Error Internal command error during 2-sided pickup
0 0004 Feed Delay Jam Paper feed fails to feed in time for image formation.
0 0010 BD Error An error was detected with laser's BD (This may also occur if no paper is picked
up.)
0 0020 Paper Feed Failure Multi-purpose Tray pickup failure
0 0040 Size Error Paper Size Mismatch

223
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

• How to See Misprint Jam Codes

Jam code 0001 to 0077 are displayed with a combination of above jam codes.
Example:
In the case of 0014: BD Error (0010) + Feed Delay Jam (0004)
In the case of 0062: Sequence Error (0002) + Paper Feed Failure (0020) + Size Error (0040)

Jam code Print Reserva- Sequence Er- Feed Delay BD Error Paper Feed Size Error
tion Resend ror Jam Failure
Request
0001 Yes - - - - -
0002 - Yes - - - -
0003 Yes Yes - - - -
0004 - - Yes - - -
0005 Yes - Yes - - -
0006 - Yes Yes - - -
0007 Yes Yes Yes - - -
0010 - - - Yes - -
0011 Yes - - Yes - -
0012 - Yes - Yes - -
0013 Yes Yes - Yes - -
0014 - - Yes Yes - -
0015 Yes - Yes Yes - -
0016 - Yes Yes Yes - -
0017 Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
0020 - - - - Yes -
0021 Yes - - - Yes -
0022 - Yes - - Yes -
0023 Yes Yes - - Yes -
0024 - - Yes - Yes -
0025 Yes - Yes - Yes -
0026 - Yes Yes - Yes -
0027 Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
0030 - - - Yes Yes -
0031 Yes - - Yes Yes -
0032 - Yes - Yes Yes -
0033 Yes Yes - Yes Yes -
0034 - - Yes Yes Yes -
0035 Yes - Yes Yes Yes -
0036 - Yes Yes Yes Yes -
0037 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
0040 - - - - - Yes
0041 Yes - - - - Yes
0042 - Yes - - - Yes
0043 Yes Yes - - - Yes
0044 - - Yes - - Yes
0045 Yes - Yes - - Yes
0046 - Yes Yes - - Yes
0047 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes
0050 - - - Yes - Yes
0051 Yes - - Yes - Yes
0052 - Yes - Yes - Yes
0053 Yes Yes - Yes - Yes
0054 - - Yes Yes - Yes
0055 Yes - Yes Yes - Yes
0056 - Yes Yes Yes - Yes
0057 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes

224
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Jam code Print Reserva- Sequence Er- Feed Delay BD Error Paper Feed Size Error
tion Resend ror Jam Failure
Request
0060 - - - - Yes Yes
0061 Yes - - - Yes Yes
0062 - Yes - - Yes Yes
0063 Yes Yes - - Yes Yes
0064 - - Yes - Yes Yes
0065 Yes - Yes - Yes Yes
0066 - Yes Yes - Yes Yes
0067 Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes
0070 - - - Yes Yes Yes
0071 Yes - - Yes Yes Yes
0072 - Yes - Yes Yes Yes
0073 Yes Yes - Yes Yes Yes
0074 - - Yes Yes Yes Yes
0075 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes
0076 - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
0077 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

■ ADF
SR9

SR10

Jam Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Area

Code
0001 Delay Jam Document End Sensor SR10 ADF Pickup Feed Area
0002 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor SR10 ADF Pickup Feed Area
0021 Other Document End Sensor SR10 ADF Pickup Feed Area
0040 Size error - - -
(The conflict of the paper size)
0094 Power-on jam Document End Sensor SR10 ADF Pickup Feed Area
0071 Sequence jam - - -
(Timing error)
0096 Other - - -

225
 8. Error/Jam/Alarm

Alarm Code

Alarm Code Details

10-0401 Cartridge life alarm (Y)
A. Operation / B. Cause / Absence of toner was detected.
C. Remedy

10-0402 Cartridge life alarm (M)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Absence of toner was detected.
C. Remedy

10-0403 Cartridge life alarm (C)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Absence of toner was detected.
C. Remedy

10-0404 Cartridge life alarm (BK)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Absence of toner was detected.
C. Remedy

226
9 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 228
COPIER (Service mode for printer)...231
FEEDER (ADF service mode)...........310
FAX (FAX service mode).................. 312
TESTMODE (Service mode for test
print, operation check, etc.)........... 318
 9. Service Mode

Overview

Entering Service Mode

For information on how to enter service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.

Backing up Service Mode

Because setting values and management data of the host machine are stored in the eMMC of the Main Controller PCB, they
need to be backed up before replacing the Main Controller PCB. (Do not remove the eMMC PCB form Main Controller PCB.)
Also, restoration of the backup data is necessary after replacing the Main Controller PCB.

Backup: Connect a USB flash drive to the USB memory port.

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT

Restore: Restore backup data of the USB flash drive.

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT

NOTE:
As for the user data (the Settings/Registration data, etc.), be sure to back up the user data before replacing the Main Controller
PCB and then restore it after replacement by either of the following methods:

Backup
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Export

Restore
• Menu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import
• Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export > Import

Service Label
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written in the service label.
In the case of the following, adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments
in the field.
• Changed Main Controller PCB
• Changed Engine Controller PCB
• After RAM clear execution
Therefore, when you made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed
values in the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in a blank field.

228
 9. Service Mode

Remote UI Service Mode

■ Function Overview
It is possible to display, configure, and execute various service mode modes as well as restart the host machine by using remote
UI.

■ Operating conditions
In order to operate service mode using Remote UI, the following conditions must be met.
• Service mode is not used on the Control Panel.
If service mode is accessed from the Control Panel of the host machine, "Log-in user exists already." is displayed when
service mode is accessed from Remote UI.

• When Remote UI service mode (this function) is not being logged in by other users
When service mode is being accessed from Remote UI, "Remote service mode" is displayed on the UI of the host machine.

Remote service mode

• When Remote UI is enabled in the setting on the Control Panel

[Settings/Registration] > [System Settings] > [Remote UI Settings] > [Use Remote UI] > [ON]
• When the following setting (Remote UI service mode function) is enabled (setting value: 1) in service mode
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > RMT-SW
0:OFF(default), 1:ON

■ How to Use
1. Activate the Web browser, and access the following URL:
http://<Host machine's IP address or host name>/servicemode.html

229
 9. Service Mode

2. Enter the password, and click [LOGIN].

Password required for authentication differs depending on the following service mode setting: COPIER > OPTION > BODY
> PSWD-SW

Combinations of service mode settings and required passwords

PSWD-SW Password required for authentica- Authentication screen

setting tion
value
0 • Password of remote UI service mode

1 • Password of remote UI service mode

• Service mode password

2 • Password of RUI service mode

• User's system administrator ID
• Password of system administrator
• Service mode password

NOTE:
• If you do not know the password of remote UI service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.
• Password of service mode can be changed in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD.

3. If you do not know the password of remote UI service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company. When
finishing the operation, click [REBOOT] or [Log Out].

NOTE:
If the user logged in and then closed the browser without logging out, connection status remains as "LOGIN". If the user attempts
to log in to service mode under "LOGIN" status, exclusive control is executed so that the user cannot access service mode. In that
case, wait for a fixed time (3 minutes) from the last access to let the user be automatically logged out, or turn OFF/ON the power
of the machine to be forcibly logged out.

Service Mode Explanation

The detailed explanation of service mode is indicating the key operation (press the Apply key) for the 5-inch Touch Panel.
Note that the key operation is (Press the OK key) for the 5-line LCD model that does not have the Apply key.

230
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer)

DISPLAY (State display mode)

■ VERSION
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
MAIN Display of Bootable version
Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

BOOT Display of BootROM version

Detail To display the version of Boot ROM (BOOT program).
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

LANG Display of language pack version

Detail To display the version of language pack.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

DEMODATA Display of demo print data version

Detail To display the version of demo print data.
For the models not having demo print function, "FF.FF" is displayed.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

ECONT Display of Engine Controller version

Detail To display the version of Engine Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

PANEL Display of firmware version of panel

Detail To display the firmware version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> PANEL-UP

231
 9. Service Mode

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
TARGET-B Display of shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Scanner
Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1202
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-B

TARGET-G Display of shading target value (G)

Detail To display the shading target value of Green.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Scanner
Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1163
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-G

TARGET-R Display of shading target value (R)

Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Scanner
Unit.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1135
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R

TARGETBW Display of shading target value (B&W)

Detail To display the shading target value at B&W jobs.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Main
Controller PCB.
Use Case At scanned image failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1072
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-BW

BK-SHDST Display paper back shading correct result

Detail To display the paper back shading correction result.
Whether the results of BK-SHD1 and BK-SHD2 are correct is displayed.
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: NG
1: OK
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BK-SHD1/2

232
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
1P-ERR-A Frt/bck clr dif calibr PG read rslt: frt
Detail To display the result of reading of PG for calibrating color difference between the front and back
sides with the Scanner Unit (for front side).
If 1 is displayed in both this item and 1P-ERR-B, it means that calibration for color difference on
front and back sides has succeeded.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8
0: Reading is not executed
1: Reading is executed
2: Reading failed (e.g.: no originals placed, jam)
3: Detection of patch edge failed (e.g.: 1st/2nd side of original reversed)
4: Failed because the degree of skew of original was too large
5: Invalid patch reading value (e.g.: original was upside down)
6: Failed due to other causes
7 to 8: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> 1P-ERR-B

1P-ERR-B Frt/bck clr dif calibr PG read rslt: bck

Detail To display the result of reading of PG for calibrating color difference between the front and back
sides with the Scanner Unit (for back side).
If 1 is displayed in both this item and 1P-ERR-A, it means that calibration for color difference on
front and back sides has succeeded.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8
0: Reading is not executed
1: Reading is executed
2: Reading failed (e.g.: no originals placed, jam)
3: Detection of patch edge failed (e.g.: 1st/2nd side of original reversed)
4: Failed because the degree of skew of original was too large
5: Invalid patch reading value (e.g.: original was upside down)
6: Failed due to other causes
7 to 8: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> 1P-ERR-A

I/O (I/O display mode)

■ Reader (R-CON > P001)
Address bit Name Symbol Remarks
P001 7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 CIS HP Sensor SR11 H: HP
1 Document Sensor SR9 H: Paper
0 Document End Sensor SR10 H: Paper

233
 9. Service Mode

ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

■ ADJ-XY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-Y Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-Y-DF Adj start pstn: stream, horz scan, front

Detail To adjust the front side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the front side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When installing/uninstalling the ADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

234
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJY-DF2 Adj start pstn: stream, horz scan, back
Detail To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When installing/uninstalling the ADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-X-MG Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan

Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard
reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use Case - When installing/uninstalling the ADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0

STRD-POS Adj Scan Unit pstn: stream, fd way, frt

Detail To adjust the position of the Scanner Unit on the Reader side in feed direction at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case - When installing/uninstalling the ADF
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS

235
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-S Adjustment of Reader shading position
Detail To adjust the position of the Scanner Unit on the Reader side in feed direction when reading the
White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the
service label.
When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the reading position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When black lines/white lines appear
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS
Supplement/Memo The shading position can be adjusted automatically by RDSHDPOS.

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-X Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit or Main Controller PCB, enter "XXXX"
of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 8273
Related Service Mode COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y/Z

W-PLT-Y Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit or Main Controller PCB, enter "YYYY"
of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 8737
Related Service Mode COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Z

236
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-Z Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit or Main Controller PCB, enter "ZZZZ"
of the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the barcode label affixed at the upper left of the
Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999
Default Value 9427
Related Service Mode COPIER.> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y

DFTAR-R Shading target VL (R) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1105
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-R
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

DFTAR-G Shading target VL (G) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1129
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-G
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

237
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFTAR-B Shading target VL (B) entry: front side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1151
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-B
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

DFTAR-BW Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1072
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGETBW
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

DFTBK-R Shading target VL (R) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1105
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-R
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

238
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
DFTBK-G Shading target VL (G) entry: back side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1129
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-G
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

DFTBK-B Shading target VL (B) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1151
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGET-B
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

DFTBK-BW Shading target VL (B&W) entry: back

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Reader Unit, Scanner Unit, or Reader Upper Cover Unit, execute DF-WLVL1
and DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048
Default Value 1072
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGETBW
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/2

239
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
50-RG RG clr displace correct: 50% book mode
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

50-GB GB clr displace correct: 50% book mode

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100-RG RG clr displace correct: 100% book mode

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100-GB GB clr displace correct: 100% book mode

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

240
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
50DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 50% ADF, front
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

50DF-GB GB clr displace crrct: 50% ADF, front

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100DF-RG RG clr displace crrct: 100% ADF, front

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100DF-GB GB clr displace crrct: 100% ADF, front

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

241
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
50DF2RG RG clr displace crrct: 50% ADF, back
Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

50DF2GB GB clr displace crrct: 50% ADF, back

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 50% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100DF2RG RG clr displace crrct: 100% ADF, back

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value -333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

100DF2GB GB clr displace crrct: 100% ADF, back

Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction that occurs
at 100% ADF mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the back side.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512
Unit 0.001 line
Default Value 333
Supplement/Memo 100 reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction

242
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M1 MTF value 1 entry:ADF, front, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M2 MTF value 2 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M3 MTF value 3 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M4 MTF value 4 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

243
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M5 MTF value 5 entry:ADF, front, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M6 MTF value 6 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M7 MTF value 7 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-M8 MTF value 8 entry:ADF, front, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

244
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-M9 MTF value 9 entry:ADF, front, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S1 MTF value 1 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S2 MTF value 2 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S3 MTF value 3 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

245
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S4 MTF value 4 entry:ADF, front, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S5 MTF value 5 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S6 MTF value 6 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S7 MTF value 7 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

246
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF2-S8 MTF value 8 entry:ADF, front, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF2-S9 MTF value 9 entry:ADF, front, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M1 MTF value 1 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M2 MTF value 2 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

247
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M3 MTF value 3 entry: Copyboard, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M4 MTF value 4 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M5 MTF value 5 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M6 MTF value 6 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

248
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-M7 MTF value 7 entry: Copyboard, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M8 MTF value 8 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-M9 MTF value 9 entry: Copyboard, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S1 MTF value entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

249
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S2 MTF value 2 entry: Copyboard, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S3 MTF value 3 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S4 MTF value 4 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S5 MTF value 5 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

250
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF-S6 MTF value 6 entry: Copyboard, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S7 MTF value 7 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S8 MTF value 8 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF-S9 MTF value 9 entry: Copyboard, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction at
copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

251
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF3-M1 MTF value 1 entry: ADF, back, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M2 MTF value 2 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M3 MTF value 3 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M4 MTF value 4 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

252
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF3-M5 MTF value 5 entry: ADF, back, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M6 MTF value 6 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M7 MTF value 7 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-M8 MTF value 8 entry: ADF, back, horz scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

253
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF3-M9 MTF value 9 entry: ADF, back, horz scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction on
the back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S1 MTF value 1 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S2 MTF value 2 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S3 MTF value 3 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

254
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF3-S4 MTF value 4 entry: ADF, back, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S5 MTF value 5 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S6 MTF value 6 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S7 MTF value 7 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

255
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
MTF3-S8 MTF value 8 entry: ADF, back, vert scan
Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

MTF3-S9 MTF value 9 entry: ADF, back, vert scan

Detail To enter the setting value for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at ADF stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of the service label on the reader.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side), enter the value of service label on a new unit.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 100
Default Value 100

OFST-BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

OFST-BW1 Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

OFST-BW2 Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

256
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
OFST2BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:frt,B&W,600dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

OFST2BW1 Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

OFST2BW2 Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

OF-BW0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:bck,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

OF-BW1BK Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:bck,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

257
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
OF-BW2BK Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:bck,B&W,300dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

OF2BW0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

OF2BW1BK Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

OF2BW2BK Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

OFST-CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

258
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
OFST-CL1 Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:frt,clr,300dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

OFST-CL2 Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

OFST2CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo The offset value is automatically updated by executing CL-AGC.

OFST2CL1 Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo The offset value is automatically updated by executing CL-AGC.

OFST2CL2 Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
front side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC
Supplement/Memo The offset value is automatically updated by executing CL-AGC.

259
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
OF-CL0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:bck,clr,300dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

OF-CL1BK Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

OF-CL2BK Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

OF2CL0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 offset:bck,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

OF2CL1BK Adj Img Read Sns 2 offset:bck,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 2 (Center) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

260
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
OF2CL2BK Adj Img Read Sns 3 offset:bck,clr,600dpi
Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Image Reading Sensor 3 (Front) of the Scanner Unit (for
back side) in color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

GAIN-BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

GAIN2BW0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

GAIN-CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

GAIN2CL0 Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in
color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

261
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
GA-BW0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: bck,B&W,300dpi
Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in
black mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

GA2BW0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in
black mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

GA-CL0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in
color mode with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

GA2CL0BK Adj Img Read Sns 1 gain: bck,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the gain of the Image Reading Sensor 1 (Rear) of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in
color mode with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LED-BW-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

262
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LED-BW-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):frt,B&W,300dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

LED-BW-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):frt,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

LED2BW-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

LED2BW-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

LED2BW-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):frt,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC

263
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LED-CL-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):frt,clr,300dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED-CL-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED-CL-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):frt,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED2CL-R Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LED2CL-G Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):frt,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

264
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LED2CL-B Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):frt,clr,600dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC

LE-BWRBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):bck,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

LE-BWGBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):bck,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

LE-BWBBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):bck,B&W,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 609
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

LE2BWRBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

265
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LE2BWGBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):bck,B&W,600dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

LE2BWBBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):bck,B&W,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in black mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1121
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2

LE-CLRBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LE-CLGBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LE-CLBBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):bck,clr,300dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 300 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 865
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

266
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LE2CLRBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(R):bck,clr,600dpi
Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LE2CLGBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(G):bck,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LE2CLBBK Scan Unit LED lgt time(B):bck,clr,600dpi

Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) in color mode
with 600 dpi.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4096
Default Value 1377
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2

LNR-GA-R Frt/bck linearity gain crrct coeffct (R)

Detail To adjust the red color gain correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 10000

LNR-GA-G Frt/bck linearity gain crrct coeffct (G)

Detail To adjust the green color gain correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 10000

LNR-GA-B Frt/bck linearity gain crrct coeffct (B)

Detail To adjust the blue color gain correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 65535
Default Value 10000

267
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
LNR-OF-R Frt/bck linearity offset crrct coeff (R)
Detail To adjust the red color offset correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0

LNR-OF-G Frt/bck linearity offset crrct coeff (G)

Detail To adjust the green color offset correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0

LNR-OF-B Frt/bck linearity offset crrct coeff (B)

Detail To adjust the blue color offset correction coefficient of the front/back side linearity.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127
Default Value 0

■ PASCAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-Y Adj Y-color density at test print read
Detail To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value 0

OFST-P-M Adj M-color density at test print read

Detail To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value 0

268
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-P-C Adj C-color density at test print read
Detail To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value 0

OFST-P-K Adj Bk-color density at test print read

Detail To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 128
Default Value 0

■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-MFY Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Multi-purpose Tray pickup (1-sided
print/2nd side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the feed direction at the time of pickup from the Multi-
purpose Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

269
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-MFX Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Multi-purpose Tray
pickup (1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 1st side
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-MFYR Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Multi-purpose Tray pickup (1st side
of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the feed direction for the image on the 2nd side at the time of
pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-MFXR Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Multi-purpose Tray
pickup (1st side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 2nd side
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

270
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1Y Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Cassette 1 pickup (1-sided print/2nd
side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the feed direction at the time of pickup from the Cassette
1.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-C1X Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Cassette 1 pickup (1-
sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 1st side
at the time of pickup from the Cassette 1.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-C1YR Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Cassette 1 pickup (1st side of 2-sided
print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the feed direction for the image on the 2nd side at the time of
pickup from the Cassette 1.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

271
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C1XR Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Cassette 1 pickup (1st
side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 2nd side
at the time of pickup from the Cassette 1.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-C2Y Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Cassette 2 pickup (1-sided print/2nd
side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the image write start position in the feed direction at the time of pickup from the Cassette
2.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-C2X Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Cassette 2 pickup (1-
sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 1st side
at the time of pickup from the Cassette 2.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 1-sided print and the 2nd side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

272
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C2YR Adjustment of write start position in feed direction at Cassette 2 pickup (1st side of 2-sided
print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the feed direction for the image on the 2nd side at the time of
pickup from the Cassette 2.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the trailing edge side.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the leading edge side.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

ADJ-C2XR Adjustment of write start position in horizontal scanning direction at Cassette 2 pickup (1st
side of 2-sided print)
Detail To adjust the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction for the image on the 2nd side
at the time of pickup from the Cassette 2.
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.001 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
The setting is applied to the 1st side at 2-sided print.
Use Case When replacing the Engine Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key) and press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5080 to 5080
Unit 0.001 mm
Default Value 0

■ PANEL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PANEL
TOUCHCHK Adj of coordinate pstn on Touch Panel
Detail To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel.
By making adjustment, the setting of TOUCH-R becomes 1.
Use Case When replacing the Control Panel Unit (included the LCD Panel)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Press the nine "+" keys in sequence.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> PANEL> TOUCH-R

TOUCH-R Touch Panel coordinate pstn adj result

Detail To set whether adjustment of the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel is
completed.
When adjustment with TOUCHCHK is completed, the setting of this item becomes 1.
Use Case When replacing the Control Panel Unit (included the LCD Panel)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not completed
1: Completed
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> PANEL> TOUCHCHK

273
 9. Service Mode

■ VIFADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > VIFADJ
DEV-HV-Y Adjustment of developing bias setting value (Y)
Detail To adjust the setting value of Y-color developing bias.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> DEV-HV-M/C/K

DEV-HV-M Adjustment of developing bias setting value (M)

Detail To adjust the setting value of M-color developing bias.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> DEV-HV-Y/C/K

DEV-HV-C Adjustment of developing bias setting value (C)

Detail To adjust the setting value of C-color developing bias.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> DEV-HV-Y/M/K

DEV-HV-K Adjustment of developing bias setting value (Bk)

Detail To adjust the setting value of Bk-color developing bias.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> DEV-HV-Y/M/C

TR2SF-HV Adj sec transfer bias set VL (1st side)

Detail To adjust the setting value of secondary transfer bias applied to the 1st side.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> TR2BK-HV

TR2BK-HV Adj sec transfer bias set VL (2nd side)

Detail To adjust the setting value of secondary transfer bias applied to the 2nd side.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> VIFADJ> TR2SF-HV

274
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > VIFADJ
ICL-HV Adj of ITB cleaning bias setting value
Detail To adjust the setting value of the bias to be applied at the time of ITB cleaning.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -5 to 5
Default Value 0

FU-TMP Adj of Fixing Film surface temp set VL

Detail To adjust the setting value of the surface temperature of the Fixing Film.
Use Case When an image failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -2 to 2
Default Value 0

■ SCNR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > SCNR
SUB-S-Y0 Not use
SUB-S-M0 Not use
SUB-S-C0 Not use
SUB-S-K0 Not use
SUB-S-Y1 Not use
SUB-S-M1 Not use
SUB-S-C1 Not use
SUB-S-K1 Not use
SUB-S-Y2 Not use
SUB-S-M2 Not use
SUB-S-C2 Not use
SUB-S-K2 Not use
MAI-S-Y0 Not use
MAI-S-M0 Not use
MAI-S-C0 Not use
MAI-S-K0 Not use
MAI-S-Y1 Not use
MAI-S-M1 Not use
MAI-S-C1 Not use
MAI-S-K1 Not use
MAI-S-Y2 Not use
MAI-S-M2 Not use
MAI-S-C2 Not use
MAI-S-K2 Not use

275
 9. Service Mode

FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

■ INSTALL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
STRD-POS Auto adj of read position at stream read
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit position in feed direction when stream reading original
with ADF.
The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS.
Use Case - At ADF installation/uninstallation
- When replacing the Scanner Unit/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Required Time 10 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS

CARD-NUM Card first number setting

Detail To set the card first number to be used for Copy Card Reader.
Use Case At installation of the Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2701
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD

CARD Set of Copy Card Reader management info

Detail To set the following management information at installation of the Card Reader.
- Register numbers of 300 cards from the number set in CARD-NUM to the department ID.
- Initialize ID and password of the system administrator.
Use Case At installation of the Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD-NUM

ERDS ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS

Detail To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

276
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
RGW-PORT Setting of UGW port number when using Embedded-RDS
Detail To set the port number of UGW to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol

COM-TEST Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test

Detail To execute Embedded-RDS communication test.
If the connection fails, the information is added to the communication error log.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-RSLT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

COM-RSLT Display of Embedded-RDS comctn test result

Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result.
Use Case When using E-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range When not in execution: Unknown
When connection is completed: OK
When connection is failed: NG
Default Value Unknown
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

COM-LOG Display of Embedded-RDS comctn error log

Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log.
The dates, times, and error codes of the latest 5 errors that occurred are displayed.
As for the error detail information, the report can be output by executing ERDS-LOG.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range Date: 6 digits
Time: 4 digits
Error code: 8 digits
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> ERDS-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

277
 9. Service Mode

■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit (included the Copyboard Glass)
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2
Supplement/Memo The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL2.

DF-WLVL2 White level adj: stream reading, color

Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the ADF.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit (included the Copyboard Glass)
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
Supplement/Memo The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL2.

CL-AGC Adj Scan Unit (frt) B&W ref: stream, clr

Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream
reading in color mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OFST-CL0/CL1/CL2, GAIN-CL0, LED-CL-R/G/B,
OFST2CL0/CL1/CL2, GAIN2CL0, and LED2CL-R/G/B are automatically calculated.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> OFST-CL0/CL1/CL2, GAIN-CL0, LED-CL-R/G/B, OFST2CL0/CL1/
CL2, GAIN2CL0, LED2CL-R/G/B
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control

278
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
BW-AGC Adj Scan Unit (frt) B&W ref: stream, B&W
Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream
reading in black mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OFST-BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN-BW0, LED-BW-R/G/B,
OFST2BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN2BW0, and LED2BW-R/G/B are automatically calculated.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> OFST-BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN-BW0, LED-BW-R/G/B,
OFST2BW0/BW1/BW2, GAIN2BW0, LED2BW-R/G/B
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control

CL-AGC2 Adj Scan Unit (bck) B&W ref: stream, clr

Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream
reading in color mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OF-CL0BK/CL1BK/CL2BK, GA-CL0BK, LE-
CLRBK/GBK/BBK, OF2CL0BK/CL1BK/CL2BK, GA2CL0BK, and LE2CLRBK/GBK/BBK are
automatically calculated.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BW-AGC2
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> OF-CL0BK/CL1BK/CL2BK, GA-CL0BK, LE-CLRBK/GBK/BBK,
OF2CL0BK/CL1BK/CL2BK, GA2CL0BK, LE2CLRBK/GBK/BBK
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control

BW-AGC2 Adj Scan Unit (bck) B&W ref: stream, B&W

Detail To automatically adjust the black/white reference level of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream
reading in black mode.
To make the adjustment with both resolutions 300 dpi and 600 dpi.
When this item is executed, the values of OF-BW0BK/BW1BK/BW2BK, GA-BW0BK, LE-BWRBK/
GBK/BBK, OF2BW0BK/BW1BK/BW2BK, GA2BW0BK, and LE2BWRBK/GBK/BBK are
automatically calculated.
Use Case - When replacing the Reader Unit
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CL-AGC2
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> OF-BW0BK/BW1BK/BW2BK, GA-BW0BK, LE-BWRBK/GBK/BBK,
OF2BW0BK/BW1BK/BW2BK, GA2BW0BK, LE2BWRBK/GBK/BBK
Supplement/Memo AGC: Automatic Gain Control

BW-TGT Set of B&W shading target value

Detail After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate
and set the black and white shading target value.
Use Case When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit (included the Copyboard Glass)/Scanner Unit
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after execution of W-PLT-X/Y/Z.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> TARGETBW

279
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
BK-SHD1 Paper back shading correction 1
Detail To generate the paper back shading correction data by scanning the Standard White Plate of the
Paper Back Reading Glass with the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Clean the glass of the Scanner Unit (for back side) and the Reading Glass.
2) Close the ADF.
3) Select the item, and then press Apply key.
Caution Execute BK-SHD1 and then BK-SHD2 in that order.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BK-SHD2
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> BK-SHDST

BK-SHD2 Paper back shading correction 2

Detail To generate the paper back shading correction data by scanning the Standard White Plate of the
Paper Back Reading Glass with the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Clean the glass of the Scanner Unit (for back side) and the Reading Glass.
2) Close the ADF.
3) Select the item, and then press Apply key.
Caution Execute BK-SHD1 and then BK-SHD2 in that order.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> BK-SHD1
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> BK-SHDST

■ CLEAR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
R-CON Initialization of Reader/ADF
Detail To initialize the factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Reader/ADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.

SRVC-DAT Clearing of service mode setting values

Detail To clear the service mode setting values.
The user mode setting values are not cleared.
The factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF are not initialized.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

COUNTER Clearing of service counter

Detail To clear the counter by maintenance/part.
The numerator printed on a system dump list becomes 0.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

HIST Clearing of logs

Detail To clear the communication management/print/jam/alarm/error log.
Use Case When clearing logs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

280
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
CARD Clearing of Card Reader connection info
Detail To clear the information on connection of the Copy Card Reader.
The data related to the card ID (department) is cleared, and the ID and password of the system
administrator are initialized.
Use Case When removing the Copy Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Execute this item after disabling the department ID management.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> E719-CLR
Supplement/Memo Procedure to remove the Copy Card Reader
1) Disable the department ID management.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
3) Execute E719-CLR.
4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
5) Remove the Copy Card Reader.
6) Turn ON the main power switch.

E719-CLR Clearing of E719 error

Detail To clear E719 error (communication error with the Copy Card Reader).
The information on connection of the Copy Card Reader is also cleared.
Use Case When removing the Copy Card Reader
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD
Supplement/Memo Procedure to remove the Copy Card Reader
1) Disable the department ID management.
2) Execute CARD.
3) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
5) Remove the Copy Card Reader.
6) Turn ON the main power switch.

ALL Clearing of setting information

Detail To clear/initialize the following setting information according to the location set in LOCALE and
SIZE-LC.
- User mode setting values
- Service mode setting values (excluding the service counter)
- ID and password of the system administrator
- Communication management/print/jam/alarm/error log
- E719 error (counter meter-installed models only)
The following items are not cleared/initialized.
- Service counter
- Factory adjustment values of the Reader/ADF
Use Case At installation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> LOCALE, SIZE-LC
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> E719-CLR

281
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
ERDS-DAT Initialize of Embedded-RDS setting value
Detail To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values.
ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW port number and communication error log set in ERDS, RGW-
PORT, and COM-LOG are cleared.
Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environment
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Use of the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless
initialization is executed at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

PLPW-CLR Clear security policy setting password

Detail To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings.
Use Case When clearing the password of the security administrator
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

■ MISC-R
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
SCANLAMP Lighting check of CIS Unit LED: front
Detail To light up the Scanning LED of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (included the CIS Unit LED)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

SCAN-ON Execution of copyboard reading operation

Detail To execute reading of the original on the Copyboard Glass.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.

SCANLMP2 Lighting check of CIS Unit LED: back

Detail To light up the Scanning LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (included the CIS Unit LED)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

1PSCLB-A Exe frt/bck clr differ calibration: frt

Detail To read the PG for calibrating color difference between the front and back sides with the Scanner
Unit (for front side) in order to correct the color difference between the front and back sides at
duplex stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the images on the front and back sides scanned
with the ADF caused by variations in the LED and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use Case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side at ADF duplex reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place the paper on which PG is printed on the ADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - Do not turn OFF/ON the main power switch during execution of 1PSCLB-A and then 1PSCLB-
B.
- Until 1 is displayed in both 1P-ERR-A and 1P-ERR-B, calibration of color difference between the
front and back sides is not completed.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> 1P-ERR-A/B
Supplement/Memo The execution result of this item is displayed in 1P-ERR-A.

282
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
1PSCLB-B Exe frt/bck clr differ calibration: bck
Detail To read the PG for calibrating color difference between the front and back sides with the Scanner
Unit (for back side) in order to correct the color difference between the front and back sides at
duplex stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the images on the front and back sides scanned
with the ADF caused by variations in the LED and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use Case When a significant color difference occurs between the front and back side at ADF duplex reading
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place the paper used by 1PSCLB-A on the ADF so that the front side is faced down and the
cyan image is placed at the left rear side.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution - Do not turn OFF/ON the main power switch during execution of 1PSCLB-A and then 1PSCLB-
B.
- Until 1 is displayed in both 1P-ERR-A and 1P-ERR-B, calibration of color difference between the
front and back sides is not completed.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A
COPIER> DISPLAY> CCD> 1P-ERR-A/B
Supplement/Memo The execution result of this item is displayed in 1P-ERR-B.

1PCLBUDR ON/OFF frt/bck clr dif calibr l-lmt set

Detail To set whether to set the lower limit of the target color difference for correction when correcting
color difference between the front and back sides at duplex stream reading.
In some cases, colors which do not need to be corrected are also corrected by performing color
difference correction at duplex stream reading.
When 1 is set, the correction level is adjusted to weaken the effect of correction. Unnecessary
correction is not executed, but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors.
The result is reflected when color difference correction is executed again after the setting is made.
Use Case When color difference occurs on the colors which did not have any difference before correction
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A/B, 1PCLBOVR

1PCLBOVR ON/OFF frt/bck clr dif calibr u-lmt set

Detail To set whether to set the upper limit of the target color difference for correction when correcting
color difference between the front and back sides at duplex stream reading.
Excessive correction is sometimes made when correcting color difference at duplex stream
reading.
When 1 or 2 is set, the correction level is adjusted to weaken the effect of correction. Excessive
correction is not executed, but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors.
The result is reflected when color difference correction is executed again after the setting is made.
Use Case When color difference occurs on the colors which did not have any difference before correction
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Expected correction result may not be obtained.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: No control
1: Weak control
2: Strong control
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A/B, 1PCLBUDR

283
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
1PCLBRST Init frt/bck clr difference calibration
Detail To initialize the correction result of calibration of color difference between the front and back sides.
Execute this item when color difference is not corrected appropriately even though 1PSCLB-A/B
is executed.
Use Case When the calibration result is not appropriate
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A/B

■ MISC-P
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
SRVC-DAT Output system data list/system dump list
Detail To output the system data list and the system dump list in the form of a report.
System data list: The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function
System dump list: The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number
of sheets printed/read, the number of errors, etc.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SYS-DAT Output of system data list

Detail To output the system data list in the form of a report.
The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function are output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SYS-DMP Output of system dump list

Detail To output the system dump list in the form of a report.
The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed/
read, the number of errors, etc. are output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

CNTR Output of counter report

Detail To output the counter values in the form of a report.
The usage of functions (reading, recording, communication and copy) is output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

ERR-LOG Output of error log report

Detail To output the error log in the form of a report.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

SPEC Output of spec report

Detail To output the specifications in the form of a report.
The current device specifications such as the location, model information, and ROM version are
output.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

ERDS-LOG Output of Embedded-RDS log report

Detail To output the log relating to Embedded-RDS in the form of a report.
The date, time, and code (8 digits) of each error that occurred are output.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-LOG
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

284
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
CRG-LOG Output cartridge replacement log report
Detail To output the cartridge replacement log in the form of a report.
Use Case When checking the cartridge replacement log
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

■ SYSTEM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD Upgrading of machine firmware:difference
Detail To upgrade the machine firmware using a USB flash drive.
Compare the versions of firmware in the machine and the USB flash drive, and update the
differences.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
The machine restarts in download mode.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DL-FORCE

PANEL-UP Upgrading of Control Panel CPU PCB firm

Detail To upgrade the firmware of the Control Panel CPU PCB using a USB flash drive.
Upgrading is performed when PANEL exists in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. Connect the USB flash drive.
2. Select the item, and then press Yes.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> VERSION> PANEL

LOGWRITE Writing sublog to USB flash drive

Detail To write sublog that includes the following information to the USB flash drive.
- Job list (job names, user names, and destinations)
- Communications log (destinations and user names)
- Job log (user names and job names)
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. Connect the USB flash drive.
2. Select the item, and then press Yes.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> LOG2USB

IMPORT Read s-mode set VL from USB flash drive

Detail To read the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/ADF, but including
those related to Finisher) from the USB flash drive.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1. Connect the USB flash drive.
2. Select the item, and then press Yes.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> EXPORT

285
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
EXPORT Writing of service mode setting value to USB memory
Detail To write the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/ADF, but
including those related to Finisher) to the USB flash drive.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
"Executing..." disappears when writing is completed.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> IMPORT

SAVE-SM Backup of service mode setting info

Detail To back up the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/ADF, but
including those related to Finisher) as a file to the USB flash drive using DCM function.
The setting information which has been backed up can be restored with RSTR-SM.
Use Case When saving the setting information before changing the service mode settings
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSTR-SM
Supplement/Memo DCM (Device Configuration Management): A function to export/import the machine's setting
information as a file.

RSTR-SM Restore of service mode setting info

Detail To restore the service mode setting information (excluding those related to Reader/ADF, but
including those related to Finisher) which has been backed up with SAVE-SM from the USB flash
drive using DCM function.
Use Case When changing the service mode settings back to those before the change
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution It is necessary to back up the setting information using SAVE-SM in order to restore the information
with RSTR-SM.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> SAVE-SM
Supplement/Memo DCM (Device Configuration Management): A function to export/import the machine's setting
information as a file.

LOG2USB Writing of debug log to USB flash drive

Detail To write the debug log stored in the eMMC PCB to the USB flash drive.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> LOGWRITE

LOG-DEL Deletion of debug log

Detail To delete the debug log stored in the eMMC PCB.
Use Case When the debug log is no longer needed
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

DL-FORCE Install machine firmware: overwriting

Detail To forcibly overwrite the machine firmware with the firmware stored in the USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade/downgrade
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Connect the USB flash drive.
2) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD

286
 9. Service Mode

■ SPLMAN
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL14159 ON/OFF of USB device ID fixing
Detail To set whether to fix the USB device ID to "000000000000".
A PC attempts to install the driver every time it is connected to a machine. However, by fixing the
USB device ID, it recognizes that the same machine is connected so that it does not attempt to
install the driver again.
Use Case When saving the trouble of selecting a device used for printing from the candidate devices because
the driver is installed every time a USB is connected
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

SPL37510 ON/OFF of ITB cleaning at paper size mismatch

Detail Normally, when paper other than that of the specified size is fed, ITB cleaning is executed to
remove toner.
When 1 is set, ITB cleaning is not executed even if paper size is mismatched. Productivity
improves, but toner soiling may occur.
Use Case When paper size is mismatched
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that toner soiling may occur to improve productivity.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0

SPL65677 Increase of paper leading edge margin

Detail To increase the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of SPL68676 is subtracted from the setting value of this
item is applied.
The margin settings which are job-specific or based on the printable area are applied regardless
of the setting of this item.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL68676

SPL68676 Decrease of paper leading edge margin

Detail To decrease the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of this item is subtracted from the setting value of
SPL65677 is applied.
The margin settings which are job-specific or based on the printable area are applied regardless
of the setting of this item.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL65677

287
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL68677 Increase of paper right and left margins
Detail To increase the margins on the right and left edges of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of SPL25607 is subtracted from the setting value of this
item is applied.
The margin settings which are job-specific or based on the printable area are applied regardless
of the setting of this item.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL25607

SPL25607 Decrease of paper right and left margins

Detail To decrease the margins on the right and left edges of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
Actually, a value where the setting value of this item is subtracted from the setting value of
SPL68677 is applied.
The margin settings which are job-specific or based on the printable area are applied regardless
of the setting of this item.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL68677

SPL93822 Setting of department ID count all clear

Detail To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts.
Use Case When prohibiting clearing of all department ID counts
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL78788

SPL78788 Setting of department ID count clear

Detail To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count.
Use Case When prohibiting clearing of department ID count
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL93822

288
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL41250 Initialize color displacement correction
Detail To initialize the color displacement correction result.
If shortage of toner occurs while [Continue Printing (Quality Not Guaranteed)] is selected by the
user, color displacement correction cannot be executed.
If color displacement correction cannot be executed while 1 is set, printing is continued based on
the setting at the time of factory shipment.
When 1 is set in the case that color displacement correction fails after replacement of the cartridge,
the correction may succeed.
Use Case - When prioritizing productivity over image quality
- When color displacement correction fails even though there is sufficient toner remains
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
3) Execute print color displacement correction.
Caution - Do not turn OFF/ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.
- Be sure to perform print color displacement correction after turning OFF/ON the power.
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Print Color Mismatch
Mode

SPL71100 Setting of the duty of Off-hook PCB

Detail This is the mode to make handsets of particular manufacturers to ring when fax reception mode
is set to "Fax / Tel (Auto Switch)".
Use Case When making the handsets of particular manufacturers to ring at the time of switching Fax/Tel
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99
Default Value 50
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

SPL00171 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value

Detail To set the maximum auto sleep shift time displayed in [Auto Sleep Time] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the time that can be set is 60 minutes maximum.
Use Case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 60 minutes
1: Time specified for each model
Default Value 0 (Europe)/1 (Others)
Additional Functions Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Mode

SPL80100 ON/OFF image left edge mask: book mode

Detail To set whether to mask the left edge of the image at copyboard reading.
When 0 is set, mask with the width based on the specification is applied for each job.
When 1 is set, mask is canceled.
Use Case Upon user's request (to print the left edge of the image)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0

SPL27354 For R&D

289
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL84194 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS
Detail To set ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS function.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol
UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

SPL32620 ON/OFF of PC-less update function

Detail To set whether to disable the PC-less update function.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Caution When LCDSFLG is 1, the setting of this item is disabled (the PC-less update function is turned
OFF).
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> LCDSFLG
Supplement/Memo PC-less update: A function to directly download the firmware from the GDLS server and update it.

SPL60061 Dspl/hide cloud print connct dest URL chng scrn

Detail To set whether to display or hide the connection destination URL settings for Google Cloud Print
on remote UI.
Use Case When Google has changed the connection destination URL for cloud print
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Display
1: Hide

SPL71700 Writing sublog to USB flash drive

Detail To write the sublog stored in the eMMC PCB to the USB flash drive.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

SPL01734 ON/OFF of remote UI service mode

Detail To set whether to allow using service mode on remote UI.
Use Case When using service mode on remote UI
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The setting value is linked with that of RMT-SW.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> RMT-SW

SPL39533 ON/OFF of department ID management

Detail To set whether to disable the department ID management.
Use Case When disabling the department ID management
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

290
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN
SPL43810 Clear of system administrator settings
Detail To completely delete the following setting information.
- System Manager ID
- PIN
After clearing of the information, it is necessary to set the system manager ID/PIN again.
Use Case When the system manager ID/PIN has been forgotten
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution Do not forget to set the system manager ID/PIN after clearing of the information.

SPL08159 ON/OFF of fax image backup data clear

Detail To set whether to clear the fax image data which has been backed up.
When 1 is set, it is cleared at next startup.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

SPL97097 ON/OFF of user setting backup data clear

Detail To set whether to clear all the user setting data which has been backed up.
When 1 is set, it is cleared at next startup.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

■ VIFFNC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > VIFFNC
SMEAR-PV ON/OFF of image smear prevention mode
Detail To set whether to execute the image smear prevention mode.
Depending on the paper type or environment (especially in a high humidity environment), thin line
or fine halftone may become lighter
Use Case When thin line or fine halftone becomes lighter
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

FEED-IMP ON/OFF of pickup jam reduction mode

Detail To set whether to execute the pickup jam reduction mode.
When using paper with which double feed is more likely to occur, pickup operation cannot be
performed at the appropriate timing because of double feed. As a result of that, pickup delay jam
may occur.
In such cases, the pickup interval is extended by setting 1. As a result of that, jam occurrence can
be reduced, but productivity is decreased.
Use Case When pickup jam occurs with paper with which double feed is more likely to occur
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that the productivity decreases to prevent jam
occurrence.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

291
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > VIFFNC
FOG-PV ON/OFF of image fogging prevention mode
Detail To set whether to execute the image fogging prevention mode.
Set 1 when fogging which looks like fine vertical lines appears. Execute the image fogging
prevention mode.
Use Case When fogging which looks like fine vertical lines occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

ICL-IMP ON/OFF ITB clean failure alleviate mode

Detail To set whether to execute ITB cleaning failure alleviation mode.
An image that was on 2 sheets before may appear lightly depending on paper type and image ratio
(in case of high image ratio).
In such a case, set 1 to execute process to alleviate ITB cleaning failure.
Use Case When an image failure (ghosting of an image on the 2 sheets before) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

FD-R-CHG Not use

STOR-DCN Backup of Engine Controller PCB NVRAM
Detail To back up the setting information in NVRAM of the Engine Controller PCB to NVRAM of the Main
Controller PCB.
Use Case Before replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Caution During operation, the setting information changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When
backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old
setting information and the new information is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSTR-DCN

RSTR-DCN Restoration of Engine Controller PCB NVRAM

Detail To restore the setting information which has been backed up to NVRAM of the Main Controller
PCB to the NVRAM of the Engine Controller PCB.
Use Case After replacing the Engine Controller PCB
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution During operation, the setting information changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When
backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old
setting information and the new information is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> STOR-DCN

292
 9. Service Mode

OPTION (Specification setting mode)

■ BODY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
DFDST-L1 Adj img crrct level: stream read, front
Detail To adjust the level of dust detection that is executed between originals in the Scanner Unit (for
front side) at stream reading.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection.
As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust
that will not appear on the image can be detected.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 255
1 to 84: Weakest
85 to 169: Weak
170 to 254: Moderate
255: Strong
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

DF2DSTL1 Adj dust dtct level: stream read, back

Detail To adjust the level of dust detection that is executed between originals in the Scanner Unit (for
back side) at stream reading.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection.
As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust
that will not appear on the image can be detected.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 255
1 to 84: Weakest
85 to 169: Weak
170 to 254: Moderate
255: Strong
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

293
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
LOCALE Setting of location
Detail To set the location.
Set the location in this item and the paper size configuration in SIZE-LC, and then clear the setting
information in ALL.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- When changing the location information
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value in this item, and then press Apply key.
2) Set the paper size configuration in SIZE-LC.
3) Execute ALL.
4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The setting information such as user mode and service mode is initialized by executing ALL. The
settings of this item and SIZE-LC are not initialized.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 10
1: Japan
2: North America
3: Korea
4: China
5: Taiwan
6: Europe
7: Asia
8: Oceania
9: Brazil
10: Latin
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SIZE-LC

SIZE-LC Setting of paper size configuration

Detail To set the paper size configuration.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, set the location in LOCALE and the paper size
configuration in this item, and then clear the setting information in ALL.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set the location in LOCALE.
2) Enter the setting value in this item, and then press Apply key.
3) Execute ALL.
4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution The setting information such as user mode and service mode is initialized by executing ALL. The
settings of this item and LOCALE are not initialized.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 4
1: AB configuration
2: Inch configuration
3: A configuration
4: AB/Inch configuration
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> LOCALE

294
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
MIBCOUNT Set of charge counter MIB scope range
Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information
Base).
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained
1: Only displayed counter* is obtained
2: All charge counters are not obtained
* : Counter specified by COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 - 6

NS-CMD5 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method: SMTP auth

Detail To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent
1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth: SMTP auth, noencry

Detail To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent
1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

NS-LGN Limit LOGIN authentication: SMTP auth

Detail To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent
1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

295
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
SLPMODE Setting of shift to sleep mode
Detail To restrict shift to sleep mode 1/sleep mode 3.
When 1 is set, the machine does not shift to sleep mode.
Use Case When sleep failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0 : Shift is available.
1 : Shift is not available.
Default Value 0

SDTM-DSP ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl

Detail To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] in [Menu].
The setting is enabled only for the model with automatic shutdown function.
Use Case When switching to display or hide the items related to auto shutdown
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution For the model without automatic shutdown function, the setting is disabled even if it is configured.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value It differs according to the location.
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time
Mode

RMT-SW ON/OFF of remote UI service mode

Detail To set whether to allow using service mode on remote UI.
Use Case When using service mode on remote UI
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

PSWD-SW Set password type to enter service mode

Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode.
2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator + service
technician".
When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for
service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.
Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: No password
1: Service technician
2: System administrator + service technician
Default Value 0

296
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY
SM-PSWD Password setting for service technician
Detail To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode.
Use Case When password is required to get into service mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
Display/Adj/Set Range 11111111 to 99999999
Default Value 11111111
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> PSWD-SW

■ FNC-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
IMGCNTPR Setting of image quality mode
Detail To set the image quality mode.
When 0 is set, "image quality priority mode" is applied. When 1 is set, "counter priority mode" is
applied. When 2 is set, "image quality priority (photo) mode" is applied.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Image quality priority mode
1: Counter priority mode
2: Image quality priority (photo) mode
Default Value 1

LCDSFLG Enabling of local CDS server

Detail To set whether to use the local CDS server.
Use Case When using the local CDS server
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SPLMAN> SPL32620
Supplement/Memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.

CRG-PROC Set oprtn at cartridge estd life reach

Detail To set the operation of the machine when the parts counter of the cartridge reaches the estimated
life value.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Not stopped
1: Stopped once
2: Completely stopped
Default Value 0

297
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
CRGLF-K Set replacement ref VL (Bk): drum, etc.
Detail To set the reference values for judging replacement of the component other than toner
(Photosensitive Drum, Developing Assembly, and waste toner) included in the life of Bk-color
cartridge.
These values are used as the basis for calculation of component other than toner when deriving
the estimated life value of the cartridge.
Use Case When toner consumption is low (when the life of the Photosensitive Drum or the Developing
Assembly decreases faster than that of toner)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 100 to 200
Unit 1%
Default Value 100

CRGLF-CL Set replacement ref VL(Y/M/C):drum, etc.

Detail To set the reference values for judging replacement of the component other than toner
(Photosensitive Drum, Developing Assembly, and waste toner) included in the life of Y/M/C-color
cartridge.
These values are used as the basis for calculation of component other than toner when deriving
the estimated life value of the cartridge.
Use Case When toner consumption is low (when the life of the Photosensitive Drum or the Developing
Assembly decreases faster than that of toner)
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 100 to 200
Unit 1%
Default Value 100

■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
CRGLW-LV ON/OFF ctrdg prep thrshld set scrn dspl
Detail To set whether to display the screen to set the threshold value for the toner level to prompt
preparation of a cartridge.
When 1 is set, [Custom] is displayed in [Display Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.] so that the user
can set the toner level (1 to 99%).
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed, so the user cannot set the toner level.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences > Display Settings > Display Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.
Mode

298
 9. Service Mode

■ IMG-MCON
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
TMIC-BK TMIC Bk PASCAL gamma LUT end edge crrct
Detail To set whether to perform the trailing edge correction of Bk-color PASCAL gamma LUT used by
TMIC.
When 1 is set, the trailing edge correction is not performed so that density of the high density area
becomes high. Consequently, texts and thin lines become clear; however, gradation of photos may
become unnatural.
When 0 is set, density of the high density area becomes low by the trailing edge correction.
Consequently, gradation of photos is improved, but thin lines may be partly missing or texts may
be faded.
Use Case - When gradation of photos become unnatural
- When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo TMIC: Error diffusion correction of photo/high image quality.

TMIC-CMY TMIC Y/M/C PASCAL gamma LUT end correct

Detail To set whether to perform the trailing edge correction of Y/M/C-color PASCAL gamma LUT used
by TMIC.
When 1 is set, the trailing edge correction is not performed so that density of the high density area
becomes high. Consequently, texts and thin lines become clear; however, gradation of photos may
become unnatural.
When 0 is set, density of the high density area becomes low by the trailing edge correction.
Consequently, gradation of photos is improved, but thin lines may be partly missing or texts may
be faded.
Use Case - When gradation of photos become unnatural
- When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo TMIC: Error diffusion correction of photo/high image quality.

■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COUNTER1 Display of software counter 1
Detail To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Caution Display only. No change is available.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

299
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COUNTER2 Setting of software counter 2
Detail To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3

Detail To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER4 Setting of software counter 4

Detail To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER5 Setting of software counter 5

Detail To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

COUNTER6 Setting of software counter 6

Detail To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 999
0: No registration
Default Value It differs according to the location.

300
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
CNT-SW Set default Display items on charge counter
Detail To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Type1
1: Type2
2: Type3
3: Type4
Default Value 0

CONTROL Charge setting of PDL job

Detail To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin
Manager or non-Canon-made control card).
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Output is available without control card. Not counted.
1: Output is available at insertion of the card. Counted.
2: Output is available at insertion of the card. Not counted.
Default Value 0

CTCHKDSP ON/OFF of charge counter list output

Detail To set whether to print the charge counter in the system management data list.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Output Report > Print List > System Manager Data List
Mode

TNRB-SW ON/OFF of toner replacement counter display

Detail To set whether to display the toner replacement counter on the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the user can check the toner replacement counter.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: Hide
1: Display (Toner replacement counters in the 190s)
2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 0

301
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
PS-MODE Setting of compatible mode at PS usage
Detail To set the image processing at PS print.
Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is
set.
Setting of a value other than the setting values means that multiple settings are combined.
(Example: 12=4+8)
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 63
4: Compatible with EFI at PS 2-sided delivery
8: strokeadjustment is enabled
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used
Default Value 0

SMD-EXPT Set of service mode set VL export target

Detail To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI.
When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When
installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not targeted
1: Targeted
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT
to 1, service mode data can be exported.

ACC-SLP Set shift to sleep3: Card Reader connect

Detail To set whether to shift to sleep mode 3 when the Card Reader is connected.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not shifted
1: Shifted
Default Value 1

RPL-IMP ON/OFF of replacement mode

Detail To set whether to import the setting information of a machine which has been exported to a different
one of the same model using DCM function.
When 0 is set, the setting information which has been exported can be imported only to the same
machine.
When 1 is set, the machine-specific setting information such as IPv4 address setting can be
imported to a different machine.
Use Case When migrating the setting of a machine to a different machine of the same series that has been
replaced
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo DCM (Device Configuration Management): A function to export/import the machine's setting
information as a file.

302
 9. Service Mode

■ ACC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
CARD-SW Set screen dspl: Coin Manager connected
Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager
is connected.
When 1 is set, authentication operation using the Coin Manager is also required.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0 and 3: Card
1: Card + authentication
2: Coin/Card
Default Value 0

CC-SPSW Setting of Control Interface Kit

Detail To set whether to support the Control Interface Kit.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Parallel use with Card Reader is not available.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Not supported
1: Supported
Default Value 0

WLAN Setting of wireless LAN function

Detail To set whether to enable the wireless LAN function.
Use Case Upon user's request
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default Value It differs according to the model.

UNIF-OF Setting of uniFLOW function

Detail To set whether to enable the uniFLOW function.
If 1 is set for this item and power is turned OFF/ON while the uniFLOW function is in operation,
the function stops. When the setting value is set to 1, the uniFLOW function is disabled.
Use Case - When avoiding failure due to error of the uniFLOW function
- When connecting to the uniFLOW server is failed due to the error in the machine
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution Be sure to change the value back to 0 after servicing.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default Value 0

303
 9. Service Mode

■ LCNS-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-BRDIM Install state Display of BarDIMM function
Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-BRDIM Trns lcns key Display of BarDIMM function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-ENPDF Install state dspl:encrypted PDF TX func

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

TR-ENPDF Trns lcns key dspl:encrypted PDF TX func

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-DVPDF Install state dspl: device sign PDF TX

Detail To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment

304
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
TR-DVPDF Trns lcns key dspl: device sign PDF TX
Detail To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

ST-U-RDS Install state display of E-RDS function

Detail To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS

TR-U-RDS Trns license key Display of E-RDS function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
2) Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits

■ LCNS-OF
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-OF
ST-BRDIM Not use
ST-ENPDF Not use
ST-DVPDF Not use
ST-U-RDS Not use

COUNTER (Counter mode)

■ TOTAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

305
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 2, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

TTL Total counter

Detail To display the total of counters of COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, and MD-PRT.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, MD-PRT

COPY Total copy counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

PDL-PRT PDL print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

FAX-PRT FAX reception print counter

Detail To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is
stacked.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL
Supplement/Memo FAX model only

306
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
RPT-PRT Report print counter
Detail To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL

MD-PRT Media print counter

Detail To count up when the media print is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> TOTAL> TTL

SCAN Scan counter

Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning
operation is complete.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

■ PICK-UP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
C1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 1.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

MF Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter

Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

307
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
2-SIDE 2-sided pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
The counter is advanced by printout in service mode.
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

■ FEEDER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
FEED ADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the ADF regardless of the size.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by ADF
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

■ JAM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
TOTAL Total jam counter
Detail To count up the number of total jam occurrences.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

FEEDER ADF jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the ADF.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

2-SIDE Duplex Unit jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

308
 9. Service Mode

COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
MF Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray.
The counter is advanced even in the case of paper size mismatch or misprint.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

C1 Cassette 1 jam counter

Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1.
The counter is advanced even in the case of paper size mismatch or misprint.
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 time
Default Value 0

■ DRBL-2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2
DF-SP-PD Display/clear ADF Sprtn Pad prts cntr
Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the ADF Separation Pad.
The number of fed sheets is counted, and the counter is advanced by 1 for paper whose length is
324 mm or less and by 2 for paper whose length is more than 324 mm.
When 0 is set, the parts counter is cleared.
Use Case - When checking the consumption level of parts
- When replacing the ADF Separation Pad Unit (included the Separation Pad)
- When clearing the counter value after replacement
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

DF-SP-RL Display/clear ADF Sprtn Roll prts cntr

Detail To display the total counter value from the previous replacement of the ADF Separation Roller.
The number of fed sheets is counted, and the counter is advanced by 1 for paper whose length is
324 mm or less and by 2 for paper whose length is more than 324 mm.
When 0 is set, the parts counter is cleared.
Use Case - When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
- When clearing the counter value after replacement
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Enter 0, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 0

309
 9. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode)

ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
DOCST Adj img lead edge margin: stream, front
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the front side at stream reading.
Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
The setting is applied to the image on the front side.
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

LA-SPEED Fine adj img ratio:stream,vert scan,frt

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction on the
front side at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
The setting is applied to the image on the front side.
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0

DOCST2 Adj img lead edge margin: stream, back

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the back side at stream reading.
Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
The setting is applied to the image on the back side.
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30
Unit 0.1 mm
Default Value 0

310
 9. Service Mode

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

LA-SPD2 Fine adj img ratio:stream,vert scan,bck
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction on the
back side at stream reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction.
(The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
The setting is applied to the image on the back side.
Use Case - When installing the ADF
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by +/- key), and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200
Unit 0.01%
Default Value 0

FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
MTR-ON Operation check of ADF Motor
Detail To start operation check of ADF Motor.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press Yes key.
The operation check is completed.
Required Time 5 seconds

FEED-ON Operation check of ADF individual feed

Detail To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

FEED-CHK Specify ADF individual feed operation

Detail To specify the feed mode for ADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
Use Case At operation check
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided
1: 2-sided
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON
Supplement/Memo In the case of ADF (1-path model), operation is the same when either value is set.

311
 9. Service Mode

FAX (FAX service mode)

SSSW (Bit switch registration mode)

SSSW No. Bit No. Function
SW 01 (Switch relating to error and copy)
Bit 0 Output of error code for service technician
Bit 1 Error memory dump
SW 02 (Switch relating to settings for network connection condition)
Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2
SW 03 (Switch relating to echo prevention)
Bit 0 TCF EQM check
Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED
SW 04 (Switch relating to prevention of communication problems)
Bit 1 Frequency check of CI signal
Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties
Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer
Bit 5 Frequency check of CI signal at PBX settings
Bit 6 No CNG transmission at the time of manual transmission
Bit 7 No CED transmission at the time of manual transmission
SW 05 (Switch relating to standard functions and DIS signal settings)
Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text/photo mode / photo mode)
Bit 3 Prohibition of bit transmission after DIS bit 33
Bit 4 Declaration of cut paper
SW 06 (Switch relating to settings for reading condition)
Bit 3 Stamp option
Bit 4 Scan width (0: A4, 1: LTR)
SW 07 Not in use
SW 08 Not in use
SW 09 Not in use
SW 10 Not in use
SW 11 Not in use
SW 12 (Switch relating to settings for page timer)
Bit 0 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission)
Bit 1
Bit 2 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission)
Bit 3
Bit 4 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception)
Bit 5
Bit 7 Timeout period for 1 page
SW 13 Bit 2 Execution of mm/inch conversion when sending the received image
SW 14 Bit 2 Setting whether to execute inch to mm conversion in horizontal and vertical scanning directions or in
vertical scanning direction only
Bit 4 Declaration of inch-configuration resolution
SW 15 Not in use
SW 16 Not in use
SW 17 Bit 1 Range of selection of transmission level of modem (0: 8 to 15, 1: 0 to 15)
SW 18 Bit 0 Detection of carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 1 Time to wait for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF
Bit 2 Prohibition of communication control for IP network
SW 19 Not in use
SW 20 Not in use
SW 21 Not in use
SW 22 Bit 3 Prohibition of manual polling operation

312
 9. Service Mode

SSSW No. Bit No. Function

SW 23 Not in use
SW 24 Not in use
SW 25 (Setting for report display function)
Bit 0 Prioritize the received abbreviated name to the dialed abbreviated name
SW 26 Not in use
SW 27 Not in use
SW 28 Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure
Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure
Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start
Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start
Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback
Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback
SW 29 Not in use
SW 30 Not in use
SW 31 Not in use
SW 32 Not in use

MENU (Menu switch registration mode)

No. Parameter Selection
05 Not in use -
06 Telephone line monitor 0 to 3
0: DIAL
1: SERVICE TECHNICIAN 1
2: SERVICE TECHNICIAN 2
3: OFF
07 Transmission level (ATT) 8 to 15
08 Upper limit of V.34 modulation speed 0 to 5
0: 3,429 BAUD
1: 3,200 BAUD
2: 3,000 BAUD
3: 2,800 BAUD
4: 2,743 BAUD
5: 2,400 BAUD
09 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0 to 13
0: 33.6 kbps
1: 31.2 kbps
2: 28.8 kbps
3: 26.4 kbps
4: 24.0 kbps
5: 21.6 kbps
6: 19.2 kbps
7: 16.8 kbps
8: 14.4 kbps
9: 12.0 kbps
10: 9.6 kbps
11: 7.2 kbps
12: 4.8 kbps
13: 2.4 kbps
10 OFF Hook signal frequency 0 to 2
0: 50 Hz
1: 25 Hz
2: 17 Hz

313
 9. Service Mode

NUM (Numeric parameter setting mode)

No. Parameter Allowable setting range
002 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99 %
003 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times
004 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines
005 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60 sec
006 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60 sec
008 STORED_DIAL_MODE wait timer 0 to 65 sec
010 T.30 T0 timer 0 to 9,999
(55 sec principally: 5,500)
011 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9,999
(France: 3,500, Others: 3,000)
012 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65,535 lines
(0: without limitation)
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3,000
(default 13 sec: 1,300)
015 Threshold between hokking nad on-hook 0 to 999
016 Lead time to the first response when switching between 0 to 9
FAX and TEL
017 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999
018 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999
019 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999
020 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999
021 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (short) 0 to 999
022 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (long) 0 to 999
023 Not in use -
024 Not in use -
025 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is ac- 0 to 999
tivated
026 Not in use -
027 Not in use -
029 Off-hook PCB duty settings (For NAC, setting can be 1 to 99
made with SPL71100 in special management mode.)
049 NSX MODEL ID 0 to 4,095
051 Threshold to detect hook 0 to 9,999
053 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 0 to 9,999
(default: 2)
054 Not in use -

NCU (NCU parameter setting mode)

■ TONE
Parameter No. Function Setting range
001 Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec
002 Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9,999 msec

■ PULSE
Item/Parameter No. Function Setting range
FORM Pulse digit format 0: DP (N)
1: DP (N+1)
2: DP (10-N)
001 Not in use

314
 9. Service Mode

Item/Parameter No. Function Setting range

002 Not in use
003 Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90 %
004 Minimum pause time 10 to 9,999 msec

■ DIALTONE
Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 Cadence pattern check Not detected Detected
Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON sig-
nal or OFF signal
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 Signal form Continuous Intermittent
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 T0 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of signal frequency 0 to 9,999

■ 2ND DLTN (2nd DIAL TONE)

Not in use

■ BUSTONE0 (BUSY TONE 0)

Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Not in use

315
 9. Service Mode

■ BUSTONE1 (BUSY TONE 1)

Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 16
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of signal frequency 0 to 9,999

■ REORDRTN (REORDER TONE)

Bit Switch

Bit No. Function 1 0

Bit 0 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 - -
002 T1 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 T2 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 T3 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 T4 timer 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 Signal detection table 0 to 21
007 Signal detection level 0 to 7
008 Number of signal frequency 0 to 9,999

316
 9. Service Mode

■ AUTO RX
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 CI ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 CI LONG ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
003 CI OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
004 CI LONG OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
005 CI MAX OFF time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 CI WAIT time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
007 CI frequency 0 to 9,999 cycle
008 CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9,999 Hz
009 CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9,999 Hz

■ CNGDTCT (CNG DETECT)

Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Description Setting range

001 At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
006 - -
007 At direct connecting to an- CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
008 swering phone CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
009 Tolerable time of instantaneous inter- 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
ruption
011 Number of detection 0 to 9,999 times
012 Hit ratio 0 to 9,999 %

■ SPECIALB
Not in use

■ SPECIALN
Not in use

■ RKEY
Numeric value parameter

Parameter No. Function Setting range

001 Connection time of flash 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)
002 Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9,999 (x 10 msec)

■ PBXDIALT (PBX DIAL TONE)

Not in use

■ PBXBUSYT (PBX BUSY TONE)

Not in use

317
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)

PRINT (Print test mode)

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)
PG-TYPE Setting of PG number
Detail To set the PG number of the test print.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 26
0 to 1: For R&D use
2: Color chart
3: For R&D use
4: Rainbow chart (vertical scanning direction, A4)
5: Rainbow chart (horizontal scanning direction, A4)
6: Color grid (A4)
7: Rainbow chart (vertical scanning direction, LTR/LGL)
8: Rainbow chart (horizontal scanning direction, LTR/LGL)
9: Color grid (LTR/LGL)
10: 16 gradations
11: 17 gradations of Y/M/C/Bk/R/G/B
12: Halftone
13: For checking ghost due to transfer failure
14: For checking the density patch
15: For checking transfer
20: For R&D use
21: For checking developing performance (white spots)
22: For checking resolution
23: For checking banding image
24: 4 colors (landscape)
25: 4 colors (portrait)
26: For calibrating color difference between the front and back sides with ADF (1-path model)
Default Value 0

COUNT Setting of PG output quantity

Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99
Unit 1 sheet
Default Value 1

PHASE Set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output

Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Even if 1 is set for a machine supporting 1-sided print, the setting is disabled.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: 1-sided
1: 2-sided
Default Value 0

318
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)
MODE Setting of test print image formation method
Detail To set the image formation method for the test print.
If PG-TYPE is 0 or 1, this setting is disabled because a specific image formation method is applied.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3
0: T-MIC
1: High screen ruling (SCA)
2: Low screen ruling (SCB)
3: TBIC
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

THRU Setting of image correction table at test print

Detail To set the image correction table that is used at the time of test print output.
When 0 is set, normal gamma LUT is used so that the density characteristics by the density
correction process can be checked.
When 1 is set, linear gamma LUT is used so that the density characteristics of this machine can
be checked.
When 2 is set, the high density area of Bk-color is printed darker.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2
0: Normal gamma LUT
1: Through (linear) gamma LUT
2: With trailing edge correction of Bk-color
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Gamma LUT: Density gradation characteristic table

NRKE ON/OFF of laser scanning transfer process of test print

Detail To set whether to perform line transfer process for skew correction of laser scanning at test print.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Transfer process: A process to correct skew of laser scanning toward vertical scanning direction

BLND ON/OFF of interpolation process at test print

Detail To set whether to perform interpolation process at test print.
When 1 is set, interpolation process is performed (no phase shift).
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Interpolation process: A process to predict, for pixels holding no color information, color based on
the surrounding pixels, and then set up the color information.

319
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)
DENS-Y Adj of Y-color density at test print
Detail To adjust Y-color density when performing test print .
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

DENS-M Adj of M-color density at test print

Detail To adjust M-color density when performing test print .
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

DENS-C Adj of C-color density at test print

Detail To adjust C-color density when performing test print .
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

DENS-K Adj of Bk-color density at test print

Detail To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print .
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255
Default Value 128
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

SW-Y ON/OFF of Y-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output Y-color at the time of test print .
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT> PG-TYPE

SW-M ON/OFF of M-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output M-color at the time of test print .
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

320
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)
SW-C ON/OFF of C-color output at test print
Detail To set whether to output C-color at the time of test print .
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

SW-K ON/OFF of Bk-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output Bk-color at the time of test print .
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1

MONOMODE ON/OFF of black mode at test print

Detail To set whether to enable black mode at the time of test print.
Use Case At test print
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0

FEED Setting of paper source at test print

Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette), the output is made from
Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette).
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution In case of using the Multi-purpose Tray, be sure to place paper on the tray before executing this
item.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4
0: Multi-purpose Tray
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
Default Value 1

START Output of test print

Detail To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, MODE, etc.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
Related Service Mode TESTMODE> PRINT

321
 9. Service Mode

FAX (FAX test mode)

■ MODEM
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > MODEM
RELAY-1 NCU relay test 1
Detail To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 6
0: All OFF
1: CML ON/OFF
2: P ON/OFF
3: S ON/OFF
4: H ON/OFF
5: HD ON/OFF
6: R ON/OFF
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-2

RELAY-2 NCU relay test 2

Detail To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU.
This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 7
0: All OFF
1: CIST2 ON/OFF
2: C1 ON/OFF
3: NORG ON/OFF
4: DCSEL ON/OFF
5: DCLIM ON/OFF
6: IPSEL1 ON/OFF
7: IPSEL2 ON/OFF
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode TESTMODE > FAX > MODEM > RELAY-1

322
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > MODEM
FREQ Frequency test
Detail To test whether the specified frequency is oscillated.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified frequency
is oscillated
by the tone transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 7
0: OFF
1: 462 Hz
2: 1100 Hz
3: 1300 Hz
4: 1500 Hz
5: 1650 Hz
6: 1850 Hz
7: 2100 Hz
Default Value 0

G3TX G3 signal transmission test

Detail To test whether the specified G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal
pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed by the G3 signal transmission function
of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 9
0: OFF
1: 300 bps
2: 2400 bps
3: 4800 bps
4: 7200 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: TC7200 bps
7: TC9600 bps
8: 12000 bps
9: 14400 bps
Default Value 0

323
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > MODEM
DTMFTX DTMF transmission test
Detail To test whether the specified DTMF signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified DTMF
signal is transmitted by the DTMF transmission function of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 12
0: OFF
1: 1
2: 2
3: 3
4: 4
5: 5
6: 6
7: 7
8: 8
9: 9
10: 0
11: *
12: #
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency): Signal method combining two specific frequencies like a push-
tone phone.

324
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > MODEM
V34G3TX V.34 G3 signal transmission test
Detail To test whether the specified V.34 G3 signal is transmitted.
By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal
pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed and modulation speed by the G3 signal
transmission function (V.34) of the modem.
Check this with the speaker.
A setting value other than 0 is indicated as a 3-digit integer (1st digit: modulation speed, last 2
digits: transmission speed).
A value other than the specified numerical value is invalid.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 614
0: OFF
• First digit (Modulation speed/baud rate)
1: 2400 baud
2: 2743 baud
3: 2800 baud
4: 3000 baud
5: 3200 baud
6: 3429 baud
• Last 2 digits (Transmission speed)
01: 2400 bps
02: 4800 bps
03: 7200 bps
04: 9600 bps
05: 12000 bps
06: 14400 bps
07: 16800 bps
08: 19200 bps
09: 21600 bps
10: 24000 bps
11: 26400 bps
12: 28800 bps
13: 31200 bps
14: 33600 bps
Default Value 0

■ FACULTY
TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > FACULTY
G34800TX G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
Detail To test whether the G3 signal is transmitted at 4800 bps.
By closing or opening the DC circuit, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at 4800 bps by
the G3 signal transmission function.
Check this with the speaker.
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0

325
 9. Service Mode

TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > FAX (FAX test mode) > FACULTY
DETECT1 Ring detection
Detail To check the ON/OFF state of CI, FC, and hook from the line.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CI (Calling Identification): Ring signal
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter): Console

DETECT2 Calling tone detection test 1

Detail To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to ON and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.

DETECT3 Calling tone detection test 2

Detail To check calling tone signal and FED.
Set the CML relay to OFF and detect the calling tone.
The detection results are displayed on the console (UART).
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1
0: OFF
1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to
switch between the telephone and fax.

326
10 Installation
MiCARD Attachment Kit-B1.............. 328
 10. Installation

2. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the

MiCARD Attachment Kit-B1 lamp of the main power are turned off, and then
disconnect the power plug.

Points to Note at Installation

Prepare a Card Reader (sales company's option) in advance.
Installation Procedure
Although the shape of the Card Reader may differ, the
installation procedure is the same. Use the long-type Card ■ Installing the CR Plate
Reader Cable.

Installation Outline Drawing 1.

NOTE:
Shift the host machine by approximately 50 mm from the
working table to release the claws on the bottom of the
Right Cover.

Checking the Contents 50 mm

50 mm

1x 3x

M4x16
1x

1x 1x
1x

1x

Check Item When Turning OFF

the Main Power
Check that the main power of the host machine is OFF.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host

machine.

328
 10. Installation

2. 4.
CAUTION:
Do not completely pull out the cassette, as doing so will 1x
disturb the balance of the product and may cause it to
fall down.

5.

80 mm

3.

329
 10. Installation

6. 7.
NOTE:
Release the claw while opening the Right Cover Unit in the
direction of the arrow.

8.

330
 10. Installation

9. 11.

12.

10.
1x
13.

331
 10. Installation

■ Installing the Card Reader

3.
1.

M4x16

1x

4.
2. NOTE:
Be sure that it does not protrude from the depression.

332
 10. Installation

5. 7.
1x

8.
3x

6.

9.
1x

1x

10. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

11. Turn ON the main power switch.

333
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................... 335
General Circuit Diagram....................336
Backup Data List............................... 339
Soft counter specifications................ 341
 Service Tools

Service Tools

Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:

Name of Tool Parts.No Use

Digital Multimeter FY9-2002 Used as a probe extension when making
electrical checks.

Solvents and Oil List

No. Type Purpose Remark
1 Ethyl alcohol • Cleaning: • Purchase locally
metal part, oil stains, toner stains • Keep away from flame

335
 General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(1/3)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+ +

)L[LQJ$VVHPEO\ +HDWHU9   

0DLQ + +HDWHU9

5HDU'RRU 7KHUPLVWRU
+HDWHU9  
)L[LQJ 6ZLWFK 7+
'HOLYHU\ 'HOLYHU\ OHIW  
- -
)L[LQJ3UHVVXUH
6HQVRU 6HQVRU 6:    
5HOHDVH6ZLWFK
F 65 65
0DLQ0RWRU
0
F
6:
-

6
6

7%

7%
- - 0

6
6
     


     




7%  )8

7%  )8
-/

99

6,1

6,/
-
         

9
 

-'+
 

-'
/RRS6HQVRU

)81(875$/

)81(875$/
65

1(875$/
)URQW'RRU6ZLWFK

0$,10'(&
0$,10$&&
)8/,9(

)8/,9(

0$,10)*
0$,10)5

/,9(
6:

9%
9%
9%

3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
E -
   3RZHU
E
                  
-; -< - - 6ZLFK )7 )7
3&%
/RZ9ROWDJH3RZHU6XSSO\3&%
81 81
- - -
                 

)'5($5616
/223616

9%

9%

9%

0$,17+
)35616
)'616

'231/
6*1'

1&
1&

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'
6*1'

6*1'
-/ -/ -/
                

-'+     
   -'+          -'+
-' -'
-'

D D

)'5($5616

0$,10'(&
0$,10$&&

9$616

9&616
0$,10)*

3:56:21
/223616

)5(4616

0$,10)5
9%

9%

9%

0$,17+
)35616

9%

5(09

3:5/('

'23(1)
9$
)'616

'231/

)65'
)65'
9%
9%

9$
9$

/('
6*1'

1&

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'
6*1'

6*1'

5/'

3*1'

3*1'

3:69

6*1'
               
                 
- - - - - -
-
-'+
-/

-'

/DVHU6FDQQHU8QLW 81
(QJLQH&RQWUROOHU3&%
9%
 

 


 

6&10$&&
-
-
 
0

6&10'(& -


 


3*1' - - - - - - -




0                                                    

6FDQQHU0RWRU
C C

)650$287

)650%287

)(('$287

)(('%287
  -'

36/73616

36/75616

)650$287

)650%287

)(('$287

)(('%287

7(67357
9'

7(03616
+80&/.1

5'B',)$
5'B5(*$

5'32:(5

5'32:(5
9%

'+3616

0)$1/.
0)$121
90

90
)(('6/

9%

3:5616
9%

3:/616

+80616

9%

5(*616

5'B3:0

5B',)$

9$
-'+

'(96/

5B3:0

02'(
 6*1' 

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'

3*1'

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'

6*1'

1&

1&

,275
6*1'
,277
6*1'
3
7&.
 9'2     

 9'2     
-/
 6*1' 
90

90
'+6/

'66/
-B%86

 %*3:0  -'+
 /'3:0  -'     
-'

-'

 /'&75/      
 /'&75/  -/
))&-

    
 /'&75/ 

-'
-'+ -'+

))&-

 9'     


-/

 6&17+      
-'+
-/

        
 %',  - -           
 6*1'  - -
&25
6
6

 9'2      -'
 9'2  6/ 6/    
  
-
  
81 81 )/$6+ ,27
B B
-B%86

-/
 %*3:0  6/ 6/  
   5'6(1625 56(1625

%.
%5
25
  'XSOH[5HYHUVH 'XSOH[5HSLFNXS

<
/'3:0 -'+ -   

81 

/'&75/
/'&75/


6ROHQRLG 6ROHQRLG 6:
0XOWLSXUSRVH -/  
65
3DSHU:LGWK
-

  'XSOH[8QLW 3LFNXS6ZLWFK
0
6HQVRU
81
/'&75/

/DVHU%'3&%  9' 
0 65
3DSHU:LGWK
81 /HIW 65
 6*1'  % 3LFNXS (196163&$ 5HJLVWUDWLRQ 7='
-'+

6HQVRU5LJKW

-'
0RWRU


 

 

7$*
WK

 9'2  5 6HQVRU
,7%81,7


 9'2 
-' -/
3$3(53,&.83*8,'(81,7
-B%86

 %*3:0  -
6
6

 /'3:0    
-'+

 /'&75/  % -'+
))&-

966
 

 

7$*
UG

 /'&75/ 
 

5
9,1



-'+
 /'&75/  -'   
-/    


966

 

 
6/
))&-

6/
 9'  - 6:
 

-


9,1 'HYHORSLQJ'LVHQJDJHPHQW6ROHQRLG


-/

 6*1'  'HYHORSLQJ -' -/

-

  
-'+

966 %
 9'2  - +36ZLWFK 0
A A


7$*
QG

9,1 5 
 9'2 


966 -' -/ 0

-'+
 6*1' 
 

 
9,1 - )L[LQJ0RWRU

 
6/

6/
 %*3:0  65
3LFNXS6ROHQRLG


)0
-B%86

 /'3:0  -' -/

0XOWLSXUSRVH 0DLQ)DQ
-'+

 /'&75/  % 3LFNXS6HQVRU


7$*
VW

 /'&75/  5


 /'&75/  -' -/

-

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1

336
 General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(2/3)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

81 81
/&' /&'
USB_B - 6)3PRGHORQO\ 81
F 81 728&+3$1(/,1&+ F

/&''HWHFW
/&''HWHFW
9GG
5(6(71
USB2.0 Relay PCB

+6<1&
96<1&
&$31
&$33
&$33
&$33

/('
/('

'&/.

1&

1&
1&
1&
&61

9287

*1'

*1'

*1'

*1'
%ODFN

$23
5:3

'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
9''
966

&

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%

'(
(3

9
9
9
9
9

36

;/
<7
;5
<1
5HG
         

- -
)3& )3& )3&
&&9,.LW &211(&725B81,7B1

62/'
  

62/'
81


&$7+2'( -
(6'*XDUG3ODWH -


-
1HZ&DUG 3DQHO0DLQ%RDUG3&$


&&9, 5HDGHU
$12'(
- /LQH3DQHO3&% )7
+'0,
- -
- 6)3RQO\ 
81
             
        
-+
- -

.2
.,
/('B(66
/('B'$7$
/('B(5525
*1'
'UDLQ:LUH

'UDLQ:LUH
-B%86
              











E E










31/B/9'6B'$7$B3
31/B/9'6B'$7$B1

31/B/9'6B'$7$B3
31/B/9'6B'$7$B1

 31/B/9'6B'$7$B3
 31/B/9'6B'$7$B1
     

31/B/9'6B&/.B3
31/B/9'6B&/.B1
-

 31/B8$57B5;
 31/B8$57B7;
62/'

62/'
81

 567B31/
/,1(B&6,2B'287

31/B&6,2B76&B&6
/,1(B&6,2B&/.

 9
 9
8+B+6'B1
8+B+6'B3

8+B+6'B1
8+B+6'B3

/,1(B&6,2B&6
/,1(B&6,2B$

31/B&6,2B'287
 9

31/B&6,2B&/.

31/B&6,2B',1
*1'

*1'

*1'

 *1'

 *1'
9B8+

9B8+

31/B8$57B5;
31/B8$57B7;
3DQHO/('3&%

567B31/

,17B76&
*1'

*1'

*1'

*1'
07










9

9
*1'
9

*1'

*1'

*1'

*1'
)* -B%86

    
SFP MFP                    -B%86
                 -
- - - - -
+'0, 567B:/$1 -B%86
 9 
 *1' 
D Serial Debug monitor
))&-
 6'B&/. 
))&-
D
 *1' 
-
 6'B'$7$ 

81




 6'B'$7$ 
 6'B'$7$  :/$1PRGHO2QO\

))&
 6'B'$7$
 6'B&0'


:LUHOHVV/$13&%
 *1' 
USB_A - eMMC  9 
81  :/$1B:8




USB B -
Main Controller PCB（1/2）

C LAN -
C

))&-
86$((85 -3 ))&-
 - -
FFC6              ))&      

-
B -B%86
B
B%86B
02'(0B&76 
*1' 
02'(0B&, 
02'(0B&, 
,17B02'(0 
567B)$; 
021,B287 
+22. 
+5/ 
*1' 

3&,B3:521
9

3&,B5,1*

*1'
3&,B(1%
9
*1' 
02'(0B'&' 
9 
9 
02'(0B(6& 
*1' 
02'(0B576 
02'(0B5; 
02'(0B7; 

*1'





















6*1'
9'2

6*1'
9'2

6*1'
723
6*1'
9'2

6*1'
9'2

6*1'
%'
6*1'
&/),
6*1'
&/)2
9'2

9'2

9'2

9'2










































9&

9&

9%
6*1'

6*1'

3*1'
-B%86
B%86B

-
 -              
-
/2&$/B5,1* - -
  
  

))&-
- ))&-

A 81
/2&$/B7,3

&25
81 A
-
NCU PCB Off Hook PCB(US/AE,EUR) Engine Controller PCB (2/2)
- Pseudo CI PCB(JP)

MFP(4 in 1 Model Only) MFP(4 in 1 Model Only)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2

337
 General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram(3/3)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

MFP Model Only $')81,7

07

F F
3'63662QO\
'RFXPHQW6HQVRU 'RFXPHQW(QG6HQVRU
65 65
5B($57+B&$%/(
  
-   


 
 
- 5HDGHU0RWRU
0
5B($57+B&$%/(
616B&$%/( &,6+36HQVRU
0 07

9B'6

9B3,
07 07
$')0RWRU
5HDGHU81,7 35,17(5B81,7
   
65

*1'

*1'
'(6
0

'6
E -'        07 E
     
0
       -/+
-
    -/
-/+      
      -
-/

)%B($57+B&$%/(
)%B&$%/(B/
')B&$%/(B/ $')B287%
$')B287$
9B'6

9B3,

$')B287%

$')B287$

%22.B287%
%22.B287$
%22.B287%

%22.B287$
9B3,
*1'

*1'
'(6
'6

07

*1'
+36
-'
D
         
      
-'
)%B81,7 D

-/+ -/+
                 -/
-/

')B&$%/(B&
))&
)%B&$%/(B& ))&

%22.B287%
%22.B287$
$')B287%
$')B287$

%22.B287%

%22.B287$
9B'6

9B3,

$')B287%

$')B287$

9B3,
1 1
*1'

*1'
'(6

*1'
+36
'6

 )5B&,6287   )5B&,6287 
                  *1'   *1' 
- )5B&,6287 
C -  )5B&,6287   C
 *1'   *1' 
&25  )5B&,6287 
 )5B&,6287 
 )5B&,602'(   )5B&,602'( 
 *1'  ))&-  *1' 
))&- &,6




))&-




 8   8 
))&-  95()B)5B$)( 
 95()B)5B$)( 
 )5B&,663   )5B&,663 
 )5B&,6&/.  ))&-я))&-㸸1 

)5B&,6&/.
&3B)5B/('


 &3B)5B/(' 
 )5B%B&7+'   )5B%B&7+' 
 )5B*B&7+'   )5B*B&7+' 

0DLQ&RQWUROOHU3&%  )5B5B&7+'  81  )5B5B&7+' 

B  %.B&,6287  B
&RQQHFWLQJ
 %.B&,6287 
 *1' 
 *1' 
 %.B&,6287 
%.B&,6287 

3'62QO\
&25 

*1' 
%.B&,6287 
5HOD\3&% 

*1' 
%.B&,6287 
 %.B&,602'( 


%.B&,602'( 
*1'  ))&-  *1' 
))&- &,6




))&-  8 



 8 
))&-  95()B%.B$)( 
 95()B%.B$)( 
 %.B&,663 
 %.B&,663 
 %.B&,6&/. 
%.B&,6&/.

 &3B%.B/('


))&-я))&-㸸  &3B%.B/(' 
 %.B%B&7+' 
 %.B%B&7+' 
 %.B*B&7+' 
 %.B*B&7+' 
A  %.B5B&7+' 
 %.B5B&7+'  A
1 
))&
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.3

338
 Backup Data List

Backup Data List

Delete
Replace Menu > System Management Settings Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > Backup by User Backup by Service
Initializ- Initializ- Menu Clear CLEAR SPLMAN
Data Location Initialize
Engine Main ing Key ing Ad- Manage- Location Location
All Data / Preferen- Function Set Desti- Network "SRVC- COUN- PLPW- SPL4381
Control- Control- and Cer- dress ment Set- Clear All R-CON *1 HIST *3 ALL DC-CON Yes/No Method to be Yes/No Method to be
Settings ces Settings nation Settings DAT*2" TER CLR 0
ler PCB ler PCB tificate Book tings stored stored
Address Main - Clear Clear - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB No - -
Book Control- UI *6 memory
ler PCB LUI *7
Settings Menu
Preferen- Main - Clear Clear - - Clear*9 - - - Clear*10 Clear - - - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB No - -
ces Control- UI *6 memory
ler PCB LUI *7
Function Main - Clear Clear - - - Clear - - - Clear - - - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB No - -
Settings Control- UI *6 memory
ler PCB LUI *7
Set Des- Main - Clear Clear - - - - Clear - - Clear - - - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB No - -
tination Control- UI *6 memory
ler PCB LUI *7
Manage- Main - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - Clear - - - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB No - -
ment Set- Control- UI *6 memory
tings ler PCB LUI *7
Status Monitor/Cancel
Job Log Main - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - - - - Clear Clear - - - No - - No - -
Control-
ler PCB
Counter
Part Main - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - - - Clear - - - - - No - - No - -
counter Control-
(Main ler PCB
Control-
ler)
Part Engine Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
counter Control-
(DC Con- ler PCB
troller)
Other
Key and Main - Clear Clear Clear - - - - - - - - - - - Clear - - - No - - No - -
Certifi- Control-
cate Set- ler PCB
tings
Service mode
Service Main - Clear - - - - - - - - - Clear - - - - - - - No - - No - -
mode Control-
setting ler PCB
values
(Reader)
Service Main - Clear - - - - - - - - - - Clear - - Clear - - - Yes Remote PC, USB Yes Service USB
mode Control- UI *6 memory mode*5 memory
setting ler PCB LUI *7
values
(Main
Control-
ler)

339
 Backup Data List

Delete
Replace Menu > System Management Settings Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > Backup by User Backup by Service
Initializ- Initializ- Menu Clear CLEAR SPLMAN
Data Location Initialize
Engine Main ing Key ing Ad- Manage- Location Location
All Data / Preferen- Function Set Desti- Network "SRVC- COUN- PLPW- SPL4381
Control- Control- and Cer- dress ment Set- Clear All R-CON *1 HIST *3 ALL DC-CON Yes/No Method to be Yes/No Method to be
Settings ces Settings nation Settings DAT*2" TER CLR 0
ler PCB ler PCB tificate Book tings stored stored
Service Engine Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear - Yes Remote PC, USB Yes Service USB
mode Control- UI *6 memory mode*5 memory /
setting ler PCB LUI *7 *8 Main
values Control-
(DC Con- ler
troller)
Password
System Main - Clear*4 Clear*4 - - - - - Clear*4 - Clear*4 - - - - Clear*4 - - Clear*11 No - - No - -
Adminis- Control-
trator ler PCB
pass-
word
Security Main - Clear Clear - - - - - Clear - Clear - - - - Clear Clear - - No - - No - -
Policy Control-
Adminis- ler PCB
trator
pass-
word
Service Main - Clear Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No - - No - -
Mode Control-
pass- ler PCB
word*12

*1. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are initialized.
*2. Service data (Except "COPIER > COUNTER" and "COPIER > FEED-ADJ") are cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*3. Service data is cleared. User data is not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*4. In the counter meter-installed model: The user data and service data and each history and the settings of the system administrator are cleared. (The system manager ID and password are changed back to the default values ID: 7654321/PWD: 7654321)
The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized.
*5. COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT / COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT
*6. Settings/Registration >Management Settings >Data Management > Import/Export
*7. Settings Manu > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
*8. COPIER > FUNCTION > VIFFNC > STOR-DCN
*9. Except "Preferences > Network Settings"
*10. Clear only an item of the "Preferences > Network Settings".
*11. Because the settings of the "System Manager ID and PIN" are cleared, set "System Manager ID and PIN" again.
*12. COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD(Setup password by SM-PSWD)

340
 Soft counter specifications

Soft counter specifications

The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:

No. Counter Details No. Counter Details

000 to 099 Toner Bottle 500 to 599 Scan
100 to 199 Total 600 to 699 Memory media print
200 to 299 Copy 700 to 799 Reception print
300 to 399 Print 800 to 899 Report print
400 to 499 Copy and print 900 to 999 Transmission

000 to 099

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

071 Toner Bottle (Black) 073 Toner Bottle (magenta)
072 Toner Bottle (yellow) 074 Toner Bottle (cyan)

100 to 199

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

101 Total 1 147 Total A (full color +mono color /small)
102 Total 2 148 Total A (full color +mono color 2)
104 Total (Small) 149 Total A (full color +mono color 1)
105 Total (full color1) 150 Total B1
106 Total (full color2) 151 Total B2
108 Total (Black1) 153 Total B (Small)
109 Total (Black2) 154 Total B (full color 1)
113 Total (Black / Small) 155 Total B (full color 2)
114 Total 1 (2-Sided) 156 Total B (Black1)
115 Total 2 (2-Sided) 157 Total B (Black2)
117 Small (2-Sided) 161 Total B (Black / Small)
121 Total (full color /small) 162 Total B1 (2-Sided)
123 Total (full color +mono color /small) 163 Total B2 (2-Sided)
124 Total (full color +mono color 2) 165 SmallB (2-Sided)
125 Total (full color +mono color 1) 169 Total B (full color /small)
126 Total A1 171 Total B (full color +mono color /small)
127 Total A2 172 Total B (full color +mono color 2)
129 Total A (Small) 173 Total B (full color +mono color 1)
130 Total A (full color 1) 181 Black Toner
131 Total A (full color 2) 182 Yellow Toner
132 Total A (Black1) 183 Magenta Toner
133 Total A (Black2) 184 Cyan Toner
137 Total A (Black / Small) 191 Toner replacement /Yellow
138 Total A1 (2-Sided) 192 Toner replacement /Magenta
139 Total A2 (2-Sided) 193 Toner replacement /Cyan
141 SmallA (2-Sided) 194 Toner replacement /Black
145 Total A (full color /small)

200 to 299

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

201 Copy (Total 1) 246 CopyA (full color 2)
202 Copy (Total 2) 249 CopyA (Black1)
204 Copy (Small) 250 CopyA (Black2)
205 CopyA (Total 1) 252 CopyA (full color /small)
206 CopyA (Total 2) 256 CopyA (Black / Small)

341
 Soft counter specifications

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

208 CopyA (Small) 258 CopyA (full color +mono color /small)
209 Local Copy (Total 1) 259 CopyA (full color +mono color 2)
210 Local Copy (Total 2) 260 CopyA (full color +mono color 1)
212 Local Copy (Small) 262 CopyA (full color /small/double sided )
217 Copy (full color 1) 266 CopyA (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
218 Copy (full color 2) 273 Local (full color 1)
221 Copy (Black1) 274 Local (full color 2)
222 Copy (Black2) 277 Local Copy (Black1)
224 Copy (full color /small) 278 Local Copy (Black2)
228 Copy (Black / Small) 280 Local Copy (full color /small)
230 Copy (full color +mono color /small) 284 Local Copy (Black / Small)
231 Copy (full color +mono color 2) 286 Local Copy (full color +mono color /small)
232 Copy (full color +mono color 1) 287 Local Copy (full color +mono color 2)
234 Copy (full color /small /double sided) 288 Local Copy (full color +mono color 1)
238 Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided) 290 Local Copy (full color /small/double sided )
245 CopyA (full color 1) 294 Local Copy (Black / Small / 2-Sided)

300 to 399

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

301 Print (Total 1) 324 Print (full color +mono color 1)
302 Print (Total 2) 326 Print (full color /small/double sided )
304 Print (Small) 330 Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
305 Print A (Total 1) 331 PDLPrint (Total 1)
306 Print A (Total 2) 332 PDLPrint (Total 2)
308 Print A (Small) 334 PDLPrint (Small)
309 Print (full color 1) 335 PDLPrint (full color 1)
310 Print (full color 2) 336 PDLPrint (full color 2)
313 Print (Black1) 339 PDLPrint (Black1)
314 Print (Black2) 340 PDLPrint (Black2)
316 Print (full color /small) 342 PDLPrint (full color /small)
320 Print (Black / Small) 346 PDLPrint (Black / Small)
322 Print (full color +mono color /small) 352 PDLPrint (full color /small/double sided )
323 Print (full color +mono color 2) 356 PDLPrint (Black / Small / 2-Sided)

400 to 499

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

402 Copy + Print (full color /small) 410 Copy + Print (full color +mono color 1)
404 Copy + Print (Black / Small) 412 Copy + Print (Small)
405 Copy + Print (Black2) 413 Copy + Print (2)
406 Copy + Print (Black1) 414 Copy + Print (1)
408 Copy + Print (full color +mono color /small) 418 Copy + Print (full color /small/double sided)
409 Copy + Print (full color +mono color 2) 422 Copy + Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)

500 to 599

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

501 Scan (Total 1) 509 Color Scan (Total 1)
505 BlackScan (Total 1) 510 Color Scan (Total 2)
506 BlackScan (Total 2) 512 Color Scan (Small)
508 BlackScan (Small)

342
 Soft counter specifications

600 to 699

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

631 Memory Media Print (Total 1) 642 Memory Media Print (full color /small)
632 Memory Media Print (Total 2) 646 Memory Media Print (Black / Small)
634 Memory Media Print (Small) 648 Memory Media Print (full color +mono color /small)
635 Memory Media Print (full color 1) 649 Memory Media Print (full color +mono color 2)
636 Memory Media Print (full color 2) 650 Memory Media Print (full color +mono color 1)
639 Memory Media Print (Black1) 652 Memory Media Print (full color /small/double sided)
640 Memory Media Print (Black2) 656 Memory Media Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)

700 to 799

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

701 Receive Print (Total 1) 710 Receive Print (Black2)
702 Receive Print (Total 2) 712 Receive Print (full color /small)
704 Receive Print (Small) 716 Receive Print (Black / Small)
705 Receive Print (full color 1) 722 Receive Print (full color /small/double sided)
706 Receive Print (full color 2) 726 Receive Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
709 Receive Print (Black1)

800 to 899

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

801 Report Print (Total 1) 810 Report Print (Black2)
802 Report Print (Total 2) 816 Report Print (Black / Small)
804 Report Print (Small) 826 Report Print (Black / Small / 2-Sided)
809 Report Print (Black1)

900 to 999

No. Counter Name No. Counter Name

921 TX ScanTotal 5 (Color) 945 TX Scan / E-Mail (Color)
922 TX ScanTotal 5 (Black) 946 TX Scan / E-Mail (Black)
939 Remote Scan (Color) 959 Memory Media Scan (Color)
940 Remote Scan (Black) 960 Memory Media Scan (Black)

343